Chrysler Sebring Convertible 2010 Owner`s manual

2010
OWNER’ S MANUAL
Sebring
Convertible
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
10
INTRODUCTION
1
CONTENTS
䡵 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Vehicle Identification Number
.............. 6
䡵 How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
䡵 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet,
located on the DVD, and various customer-oriented
documents. Please take the time to read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR威 parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain this Owner’s Manual:
with the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will
be aware of all safety warnings.
INTRODUCTION
5
1
6
INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in an accident or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is visible
from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
number also appears on the Automobile Information
Vehicle Identification Number
Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
vehicle registration, and the title.
INTRODUCTION
7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 䡵 Illuminated Entry — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 20
䡵 Sentry Key威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 䡵 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
▫ Convertible Top Operation Button — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
䡵 Vehicle Security Alarm — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 18
▫ Rearming The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
▫ To Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
10
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Remote Open Window Feature — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . 26
▫ Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
䡵 Remote Starting System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 27
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
䡵 Trunk Lock And Release
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
䡵 Trunk Safety Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
▫ Trunk Internal Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . 37
䡵 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . 44
䡵 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
▫ Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners — If Equipped . . . . . . 45
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
▫ Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) . . 46
䡵 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
11
▫ BeltAlert威 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 77
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . 51 䡵 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
▫ Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . 58
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
2
12
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The authorized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has
the key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These
numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your
authorized dealer. Ask your authorized dealer for these
numbers and keep them in a safe place.
You can insert the double-sided keys into the locks with
either side up.
Vehicle Key
Ignition Key Removal
Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the ignition switch to
the ACC position, push the key slightly inward, rotate the
key to the LOCK position, and remove the key.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
13
NOTE:
• If you try to remove the key before you place the shift
lever into PARK, the key may become trapped temporarily in the ignition switch lock cylinder. If this
occurs, rotate the key to the right slightly, then remove
the key as described. If a malfunction occurs, the
system will trap the key in the ignition switch lock
cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and stopped, but the
key cannot be removed until you obtain service.
Ignition Switch Positions
1 — LOCK
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON
4 — START
• For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window
switches, radio, hands–free system (if equipped), and
power outlets will remain active for 45 seconds after
the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position.
Opening either door will cancel this feature.
2
14
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window
switches, radio, hands–free system (if equipped), and
power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either door will cancel this feature. The
time for this feature is programmable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition,
sounds a chime signal to remind you to remove the key.
WARNING!
NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds
when the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC
position.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
SENTRY KEY姞
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
15
The system uses ignition keys, which have an embedded
electronic chip (transponder), to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two
seconds if someone uses an invalid key to start the
engine.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible by an authorized dealer.
NOTE: A key, which has not been programmed, is also
considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the
ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.
Always remove the Sentry Key威 from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
During normal operation, after turning the ignition
switch ON, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for
three seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains after
the bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with
the electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash
after the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an
invalid key to start the engine. Either of these conditions
will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds.
CAUTION!
NOTE: The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System is not
compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
2
16
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Replacement Keys
Customer Key Programming
You can program new keys to the system if you have two
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
valid Sentry Keys威 by performing the following procevehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once
dure:
a Sentry Key威 has been programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
1. Cut the additional Sentry Key威 Transponder blank(s)
to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN). 2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch. Turn
This PIN is required for authorized dealer replacement of the ignition switch to the ON position for at least three
keys. Duplication of keys may be performed at an seconds, but no longer than 15 seconds. Then, turn the
authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Pro- ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first
gramming procedure. This procedure consists of pro- key.
gramming a blank key to the vehicle electronics. A blank
3. Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch.
key is one which has never been programmed.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威 Immobilizer 15 seconds. After 10 seconds, a chime will sound. In
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an addition, the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash.
authorized dealer.
Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and
remove the second key.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Insert a blank Sentry Key威 into the ignition switch.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within
60 seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime will sound.
In addition, the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing.
To indicate that programming is complete, the Vehicle
Security Light will turn on again for three seconds and
then turn off.
17
dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the systems memory. This will prevent the lost key from starting
your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be reprogrammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to an authorized dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed.
General Information
The Sentry Key威 system complies with FCC rules part 15
The new Sentry Key威 is programmed. The Remote and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter will also be pro- subject to the following conditions:
grammed during this procedure.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys. If you
• This device must accept any interference that may be
do not have a programmed Sentry Key威, contact your
received, including interference that may cause undesauthorized dealer for details.
ired operation.
NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your authorized
2
18
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
To Arm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the doors and trunk
1. Remove the keys from the ignition switch and get out
for unauthorized entry and ignition switch for unauthoof the vehicle.
rized operation.
2. Lock the door using either the power door lock switch
If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security
(one door must be open) or the LOCK button on the
Alarm will signal for about 18 minutes. For the first three
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter (doors can be
minutes, the horn will sound intermittently and the
open or closed), and close all doors.
headlights, park lamps and/or turn signals will flash and
the Vehicle Security Light in the cluster will flash. Then NOTE: The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you
lock the doors with the manual door lock plungers.
the exterior lights will flash for another 15 minutes.
Rearming The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the
horn after three minutes, turn off all of the visual signals
after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will
rearm itself.
3. The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster
will flash for 16 seconds. This shows that the Vehicle
Security Alarm is arming. During this period, if a door is
opened, the ignition switch is turned ON, or the power
door locks are unlocked in any manner, the Vehicle
Security Alarm will automatically disarm.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
19
NOTE:
NOTE:
• During the 16 second arming period, if a door is • The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk button on
opened or the ignition switch is turned ON, the
the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle
Vehicle Security Alarm will automatically disarm.
Security Alarm.
• Once armed, the Vehicle Security Alarm disables the • The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during
unlock switch on the driver door trim panel and
trunk entry. Pressing the trunk button will not disarm
passenger door trim panel, the trunk release button on
the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone enters the
the instrument panel, and the HomeLink威/Garage
vehicle through the trunk and opens any door, the
Door Opener (if equipped).
alarm will sound.
To Disarm The System
Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter
or insert a valid Sentry Key威 into the ignition lock
cylinder and turn the key to the ON/START position.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
Vehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alarm. If one
of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of
whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the
vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
2
20
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected. The
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting (if
equipped). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Tamper Alert
If the alarm was triggered, but the warning signals have
timed out, the park and taillights flash three times
(instead of the normal twice), and the horn will chirp
three times, when unlocking the vehicle with a valid RKE
transmitter to alert the driver.
The interior lights will fade to off after approximately
30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the
ignition switch is turned ON.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
The courtesy/reading lights will turn on when you use
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or open
either door.
NOTE: The illuminated entry system will not operate
the interior lights if the dimmer control is in the “defeat”
position (extreme downward position).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
21
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors, open
the trunk, open the convertible top (if equipped), lower
both door and rear quarter windows (if equipped), or
activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to 66 ft (20 m)
using a hand-held Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at
the vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE:
• The line of transmission must not be blocked with
metal objects when using the RKE transmitter.
RKE Transmitter with Integrated Key
• Inserting the key into the ignition switch disables all
To Unlock the Doors
buttons on the RKE transmitter.
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice to
unlock both doors. The turn signal lights will flash to
acknowledge the unlock signal. The Illuminated Entry
system (if equipped) will also turn on.
2
22
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors First
Press
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or both doors on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information
Center
(EVIC)/Personal
Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle, by
pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition in the LOCK position, and the
key removed.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
Vehicle Security Alarm System. Opening a door with the
Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the
following procedure:
Vehicle Security Alarm System.
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter for at least four seconds, but not longer
than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK
button while still holding the LOCK button.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Flash Lights with Lock
The feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
the current setting, proceed as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information
Center
(EVIC)/Personal
Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
23
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle, by
pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition in the LOCK position, and the
key removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security
Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security
following procedure:
Alarm System.
1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter for at least four seconds, but not longer
than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK button
while still holding the UNLOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
Illuminated Approach — If Equipped
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
2
24
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Fea- • For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
tures)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
following steps:
further information.
1. Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least four seconds, but not longer than
To Lock the Doors
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit- 10 seconds. Then, press the PANIC button while still
ter to lock both doors. The turn signal lights will flash holding the LOCK button.
and the horn will chirp once to acknowledge the lock 2. Release both buttons at the same time.
signal.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle, by
Sound Horn with Lock
pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors the ignition in the LOCK position, and the key removed.
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
turned on or off. To change the current setting, proceed as
its previous setting.
follows:
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security
Information
Center
(EVIC)/Personal
Settings Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understand- UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Alarm System.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Convertible Top Operation Button — If Equipped
Refer to “Convertible Top Operation” under “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
25
Using the Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse
To Unlatch the Trunk
on and off, and the Illuminated Entry system (if
Press the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two
equipped) will turn on.
times to unlatch the trunk.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
Remote Open Window Feature — If Equipped
you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second
This feature allows you to remotely lower both door and
time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph (8 km/h) or greater.
rear quarter windows at the same time. Lowering the
windows using the RKE is a two step operation:
NOTE: You may need to be close to the vehicle when
using the RKE transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due
1. Press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button once.
to the Radio Frequency (RF) noises emitted by the
2. Press the UNLOCK button a second time and hold the system.
button until the windows lower completely or the windows drop to the desired level, then release the button.
2
26
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Programming Additional Transmitters
Refer to Sentry Key威 “Customer Key Programming.”
If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
contact your authorized dealer for details.
Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Battery Service
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
1. With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down, use a
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
flat blade tool to pry the two halves of the RKE transmitrubbing alcohol.
ter apart. Make sure not to damage the seal during
removal.
3. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
27
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with tower, airport transmitter, military base, and some mobile
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the or CB radios.
following conditions:
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve2. This device must accept any interference that may be
niently from outside the vehicle while still
received including interference that may cause undesired
maintaining security. The system has a range of
operation.
approximately 66 ft (20 m).
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could NOTE: The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
distance, check for these two conditions:
engine will remote start:
1. Weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected life
• Shift lever in PARK
of battery is five years.
• Doors closed
2
28
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Hood closed
WARNING! (Continued)
• Trunk closed
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
• Ignition key removed from ignition switch
• Battery at an acceptable charge level, and
• RKE PANIC button not pressed
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
(Continued)
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Press and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice, within five seconds. The parking lights will flash and the horn
will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the
engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the
Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
• For security, power window operation is disabled
when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15 minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
29
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position DOOR LOCKS
before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
Manual Door Locks
To Exit Remote Start Mode without Driving the
To lock each door, push the door lock plunger on each
Vehicle
door trim panel downward. To unlock each door, pull the
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or door lock plunger on each door trim panel upward.
allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system
will disable the one-time press of the remote start button
for two seconds after receiving a valid remote start
request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle
Before the end of the 15 minute cycle, press and release
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped).
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON position
in order to drive the vehicle.
Manual Lock Plunger
2
30
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the door lock plunger is down when you shut the door, Power Door Locks
the door will lock. Make sure the keys are not inside the A door lock switch is located on the driver and passenger
door trim panel. Press this switch to lock or unlock the
vehicle before closing the door.
doors.
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
from the ignition lock, and lock your vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause
severe personal injuries and death.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in
the ignition. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Power Door Lock Switch
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Auto Door Locks
When enabled, your door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled
by your authorized dealer. See your authorized dealer for
programming.
31
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
Auto Unlock Door on Exit Programming
The Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit feature can be
enabled or disabled as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Auto Unlock on Exit
Information
Center
(EVIC)/Personal
Settings
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understandpower door locks if:
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit feature is en• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
abled.
following procedure:
2. The transaxle was in gear and the vehicle speed
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and
3. The transaxle is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK
position.
4. The driver door is opened.
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
2
32
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Press the power door UNLOCK switch to unlock the
doors.
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
NOTE: This feature will not be functional until the
vehicle has been driven and the shift lever returned to the
PARK position.
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
AUTO Power Window Switches
There is a single window control on the passenger’s door
WINDOWS
trim panel, which operates the passenger door window.
The window controls will operate when the ignition
Power Windows
The window controls on the driver’s door trim panel switch is turned to the ON or ACC position, and when
operate the door windows and the rear quarter windows. the accessory delay feature is active.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• If a fluttering noise is heard from the rear seat belts
while driving with the windows down, safely bring
the vehicle to a stop and buckle the rear seat belts over
the empty seats. This will keep tension on the seat
belts and remove the fluttering condition.
WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or
death.
33
Smart Glass Feature
The door window will lower slightly if the window is
fully up when opening the door. The window will return
to its full up position after closing the door. This action
allows the door to open without resistance and prevents
window and top seal damage.
Auto Window Down — If Equipped
The front window controls on the driver and passenger
door trim panels have an Auto-Down feature. These
switches are labeled AUTO to indicate this capability.
Push the window switch past the first detent, release, and
the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, push the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
To cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the switch
either in the up or down direction and release the switch.
2
34
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window switches
will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch
is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either door will
cancel this feature.
To reactivate the window Smart Glass Feature, perform
the following steps after vehicle power is restored.
1. Lowering all four windows to the full open position.
2. Press and hold the Power Top Switch in the Close
direction. Once the Power Top becomes fully closed, all
For vehicles equipped with EVIC, the power window
four windows will start closing.
switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening 3. Continue to hold the Power Top Switch an additional
either door will cancel this feature. The time for this two seconds after the windows are fully closed.
feature is programmable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
4. Push all the window switches down firmly to open the
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customerwindows completely and continue to hold the switch
Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Indown for an additional two seconds after the window is
strument Panel” for further information.
fully open.
Reset Window Smart Glass Feature for
Window Lockout Switch
Opening/Closing the Door
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim
If the vehicle battery goes dead, the window Smart Glass
panel allows you to disable the window control on the
Feature for opening and closing the door will be disabled.
passenger door. To disable the window control on the
passenger door, press and release the window LOCK
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
35
button (setting it in the down position). To enable the Wind Buffeting
window control, press and release the window LOCK Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
button again (setting it in the up position).
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with one
window down in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized.
If the buffeting occurs with one window open, then open
both windows together to minimize the buffeting.
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE
To unlatch the trunk lid from inside the vehicle, press and
release the TRUNK RELEASE Button located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
Window Lockout Switch
NOTE: The convertible top must be either closed and
latched or open and latched to release the trunk.
2
36
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The trunk release button on the dash
will be disabled if the vehicle is locked
by pressing the power door lock
switch or by pressing the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter. The trunk release
button will be enabled when the veTrunk Release
hicle is unlocked by the RKE or if the
Button
key is inserted into the ignition and
turned to ON or START.
NOTE: This provides a locked area in the vehicle even
if the convertible top is open.
To unlatch the trunk lid from outside the vehicle, press
and release the TRUNK RELEASE button on the RKE
transmitter two times.
With the ignition ON, the word “deck” will display in the
odometer indicating the trunk is open. The odometer
display will reappear once the trunk is closed or if the
trip button is pressed.
With the ignition switch in the LOCK position or with the
key out, the word “deck” will display until the trunk is
closed.
On vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the words “Trunk Ajar” will
display.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
37
TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
WARNING!
2
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
heat stroke.
Trunk Internal Emergency Release
As a security measure, a Trunk Internal Emergency
Release lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism.
In the event of an individual being locked inside the
trunk, the trunk can be simply opened by pulling on the
glow-in-the-dark handle attached to the trunk latching
mechanism.
Trunk Internal Emergency Release
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems. The following safety
features are standard on your vehicle:
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating
positions
38
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passenger
all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the
desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large
item in a seat — if equipped
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) located
on top of the front seats (integrated into the head If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
restraint)
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags (SAB) — if
infant and child restraint systems. Refer to “LATCH —
equipped
Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower Anchors and Tether
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering for CHildren).
wheel
NOTE: The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage
• Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
inflator design. This allows the airbag to have different
rates of inflation based on the severity and type of
• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners to enhance
collision.
occupant protection by managing occupant energy
during an impact event — if equipped
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
• All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) include
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the
possible.
seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
39
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision, the belt will
lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
vehicle or being thrown out.
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
2
40
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
• Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the front seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
41
2. The seat belt latch plate is on the outboard side of the 3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
front seat, next to your arm. Grasp the latch plate and plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as
far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap.
Inserting Latch Plate into Buckle
Pulling Out the Latch Plate
2
42
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal
injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
lift up on the shoulder belt and pull on the lap belt. A
snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a
collision.
43
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be
at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt can’t do its job properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt
is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your
vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
Positioning the Lap Belt
2
44
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. 1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. anchor point.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
allow the belt to retract fully.
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180° to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode — If
Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically prelocked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is availUse the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
able on all passenger-seating positions with a combinashoulder belt.
tion lap/shoulder belt.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety
seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with
this feature. Children 12 years old and under should
always be properly restrained in the rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
45
Seat Belt Pretensioners — If Equipped
The seat belts for both front seating positions may be
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices improve the performance of the seat belt
by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early
in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
the entire belt is extracted.
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Renow in the Automatic Locking Mode.
straint Controller (ORC). Like the airbags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
deployed airbag, must be replaced immediately.
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
2
46
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
These head restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment can not be
readily identified by any markings, only through visual
inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be
split in two halves, with the front half being soft foam
and trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
How the Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the severity, or type of rear impact will require
the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear
impact requires deployment, both the driver and front
passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts.
NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may
not deploy in the event of a front or side impact.
However if during a front impact, a secondary rear
impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the severity and type of the impact.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
47
CAUTION!
All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in order
to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
collision.
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting Active
Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle”.
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
1 — Head Restraint Front Half
(Soft Foam and Trim)
2 — Seatback
3 — Head Restraint Back Half
(Decorative Plastic Rear
Cover)
4 — Head Restraint Guide
Tubes
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in a collision,
you must reset the head restraint on the driver’s and
front passenger seat. You can recognize when the Active
Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they
have moved forward (as shown in step three of the
resetting procedure).
2
48
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat.
3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the
vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism.
Hand Positioning Points On AHR
2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at
a comfortable position.
1 — Downward Movement
2 — Rearward Movement
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
49
2
3 — Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism
AHR In Reset Position
NOTE:
4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock • If you have difficulties or problems resetting the
Active Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer.
into the back decorative plastic half.
• For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints
checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized
dealer.
50
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert姞)
If the driver’s seat belt has not been buckled within
60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed
is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the BeltAlert威 will alert
the driver to buckle the seat belt. The driver should also
instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Once the warning is triggered, the BeltAlert威 will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for
96 seconds or until the driver’s seat belt is buckled. The
BeltAlert威 will be reactivated if the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle
speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
BeltAlert姞 Programming
BeltAlert威 can be enabled or disabled by your authorized
dealer or by performing the following steps:
NOTE: Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert威.
1. With all doors closed, and the ignition switch in any
position except ON or START, buckle the driver’s seat
belt.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
start the engine. Wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to
turn off and then proceed to the next step.
NOTE: You must perform the following steps within
BeltAlert威 will be reactivated if the driver’s seat belt is
60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON
unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle
position.
speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
3. Unbuckle and then re-buckle the driver’s seat belt at
least three times within 10 seconds, ending with the seat
belt buckled.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
51
NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
on while unbuckling and turn off while re-buckling the abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
seat belt. It may be necessary to retract the seat belt the force if there is a collision.
partially after unbuckling it.
Seat Belt Extender
4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. A If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended, your
single chime will sound to signify that you have success- authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt
extender. This extender should be used only if the
fully completed the programming.
existing belt is not long enough. When it is not required,
BeltAlert威 can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.
remove the extender, and stow it.
NOTE: Although BeltAlert威 is deactivated, the Seat Belt
WARNING!
Reminder Light will continue to illuminate as long as the
driver’s seat belt is unbuckled.
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is low and snug, and in the recommended seating
the best way to keep the baby safe.
positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
2
52
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - Airbags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Airbags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Airbag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Airbag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers.
Front Airbag Components
1 — Driver Advanced Front Airbag
2 — Passenger Advanced Front Airbag
3 — Knee Bolster
NOTE: These airbags are certified to the new Federal
regulations for Advanced Airbags.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
53
The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator • After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
design. This allows the airbag to have different rates of
authorized dealer immediately.
inflation that are based on the severity and type of
Airbag System Components
collision.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following airbag
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front system components:
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Airbags based upon
• Airbag Warning Light
seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front • Steering Wheel and Column
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
• Instrument Panel
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the • Knee Impact Bolster
Advanced Front Airbags.
• Driver Advanced Front Airbag
NOTE:
• Passenger Advanced Front Airbag
• Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim;
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags (SAB)
but they will open during airbag deployment.
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
2
54
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
and Seat Track Position Sensors
• Supplemental Active Head Restraint for Driver and
Front Passenger
Advanced Front Airbag Features
The Advanced Front Airbag system has multistage driver
and front passenger airbags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires airbag deployment. The timing of
the second stage determines whether the output force is
low, medium, or high. If a low output is sufficient to meet
the need, the remaining gas in the inflator is expended.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the
airbag on the instrument panel, because any such
objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the airbag to
inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the airbag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the airbags and you could be injured
because the airbags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the airbag cushions are
designed to open only when the airbags are inflating.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
55
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.
2
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags (SAB)
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant during a
side impact. The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbag is marked with an airbag label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbag Label
When the airbag deploys, it opens the seam between the
front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each airbag
deploys independently, that is a left side impact deploys
the left airbag only and a right-side impact deploys only
the right airbag.
56
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side airbags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could
be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
WARNING!
Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
Advanced Front Airbag. An airbag deployment can
cause severe injury or death to infants in that position.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and the front passenger, and position front occupants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
Airbags.
belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front secured in the rear seat in child restraints or beltAirbags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
protection for the driver and front passenger. Side airbags child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection. ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
their arm.
risk of harm from a deploying airbag:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
57
If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)
5. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ.
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
WARNING!
2. All occupants should ALWAYS wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced
Front Airbags room to inflate.
4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side airbags, and deployment occurs, the
side airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door.
• Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
airbags.
(Continued)
2
58
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Airbag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Side airbags also need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbags, Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Airbags — if equipped, and front seat
belt pretensioners — if equipped, as required, depending
on the severity and type of impact.
Advanced Front Airbags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts in
certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and
type of collision. Advanced Front Airbags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover
collisions.
The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other
hand, depending on the type and location of impact,
required for this vehicle.
Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes with
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe
side airbags in a frontal or side collision is required. initial deceleration.
Based on the impact sensors signals, a central electronic
Airbag Deployment Sensors and Controls
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
59
The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions. Side The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
of collision.
Also, the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approximately six to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Airbag Warning Light will turn off. If the
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colliORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
turns on the Airbag Warning Light, either momentarily
away from an inflating airbag.
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of comes on again after initial startup.
the airbag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instruSTART or ON position. If the key is in the OFF position,
ment cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction is
in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the airbag
noted that could affect the airbag system. The diagnostics
system is not on and the airbags will not inflate.
also record the nature of the malfunction.
Because airbag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not
good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have
deployed.
2
60
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the airbags to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
airbag system immediately.
Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units
The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are
located in the center of the steering wheel and the right
side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a
collision requiring the Advanced Front Airbags, it signals
the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is
generated to inflate the Advanced Front Airbags. Different airbag inflation rates are possible, based on the
collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim
cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the airbags inflate to
their full size. The airbags fully inflate in about 50 to 70
milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to
blink your eyes. The airbags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
The Advanced Front Airbag gas is vented through the
vent holes in the sides of the airbag. In this way, the
airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbag Inflator
Units — If Equipped
The Side Impact (SRS) Seat-Mounted Side Airbags are
designed to activate only in certain side collisions.
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side
airbags to inflate based on the severity and type of
collision.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the airbag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON positions. These include all of the items
previously mentioned.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side
airbag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be
triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The
inflating side airbag exits through the seat seam into the
space between the occupant and the door. The side
airbags fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds. The side
airbag moves at a very high speed and with such a high
force, that it could injure you if you are not seated
properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the
side airbag inflates. This especially applies to children.
61
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
event the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition key is turned off.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
removed.
Front and Side Impact Sensors
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the
• Unlock the doors automatically.
ORC in determining appropriate response to impact
events. Additional sensors in the ORC determine the If a Deployment Occurs
The front airbags are designed to deflate immediately
level of airbag deployment and provide verification.
after deployment.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment, if
the communication network remains intact, and the
2
62
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Front and/or side airbags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the airbag system.
If you do have a collision, which deploys the airbags, any
or all of the following may occur:
airbag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate
the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
• The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have depassenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
airbags will not be in place to protect you.
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
WARNING!
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor protect you in another collision. Have the airbags,
immediately.
seat belt pretensioners, and the front passenger seat
belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized
• As the airbags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
dealer as soon as possible. Also, have the Occupant
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
Restraint Controller System serviced as well.
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintaining Your Airbag System
63
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the airbag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the airbag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,
or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system.
(Continued)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your advanced airbag system. The airbag may inflate
accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any advanced airbag system service. If your seat including your trim cover and
cushion needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify the
airbag system for persons with disabilities, contact
your authorized dealer.
2
64
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Airbag Warning Light
You will want to have the airbags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. While
the airbag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have
an authorized dealer service the system immediately.
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The airbags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
proper airbag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
fuse is good.
• The Airbag Warning Light does not come on during Event Data Recorder (EDR)
the six to eight seconds when the ignition switch is In the event of a collision, your vehicle is designed to
record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data paramfirst turned on.
eters (see list below) in an event data recorder prior to the
• The Airbag Warning Light remains on after the six to
moment of airbag deployment, or near deployment (if
eight second interval.
applicable), and up to a quarter second of either high• The Airbag Warning Light comes on intermittently or speed deceleration data or change in velocity during
remains on while driving.
and/or after airbag deployment or near-deployment.
EDR data is ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys, or
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
nearly deploys, and is otherwise unavailable.
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
1. A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag
sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indicative of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant airbag
deployment.
2. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be
recorded (e.g., loss of battery power).
In conjunction with other data gathered during a complete accident investigation, the electronic data may be
used by Chrysler Group LLC and others to learn more
about the possible causes of crashes and associated
injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle performance. In addition to crash investigations initiated by
Chrysler Group LLC, such investigations may be requested by customers, insurance carriers, government
officials, and professional crash researchers, such as those
associated with universities, and with hospital and insurance organizations.
65
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by
Chrysler Group LLC (regardless of initiative), the company or its designated representative will first obtain
permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the
vehicle (usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before
accessing the electronic data stored, unless ordered to
image the data by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e.,
pursuant to a warrant). A copy of the data will be
provided to the custodial entity upon request. General
data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes
may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash
databases, such as those maintained by the U.S. government and various states. Data of a potentially sensitive
nature, such as would identify a particular driver, vehicle, or crash, will be treated confidentially. Confidential
data will not be disclosed by Chrysler Group LLC to any
third party except when:
2
66
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data • Pedal position
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
• And other parameters depending on vehicle
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
configuration
preserved.
Child Restraints
2. Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
Group LLC product.
time, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant.
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
4. Otherwise required by law.
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Data parameters that are recorded:
Children 12 years and younger should ride properly
• Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning light status for buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
electronically-controlled safety systems, including the statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
airbag system
the rear seats, rather than in the front.
• Vehicle speed
• Engine RPM
• Brake switch status
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap could
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat owner’s manual to ensure you have the correct seat
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
child.
67
Infants and Child Restraints
• Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant
carriers and convertible child seats.
• The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). Convertible child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
less than one year old. Both types of child restraints are
held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the
2
68
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LATCH child restraint anchorage system. Refer to restraint anchorage system. Refer to “LATCH — Child
“LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower Seat Anchorage System (Lower Anchors and Tether for
Anchors and Tether for CHildren)”.
CHildren)”.
WARNING!
Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger
airbag. An airbag deployment could cause severe
injury or death to infants in this position.
Older Children and Child Restraints
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are
older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children
who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who are older
than one year. These child seats are also held in the
vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing
more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit
the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit
with knees bent over the vehicle’s cushion while the
child’s back is against the seatback, then the child should
use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and booster
seat are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt.
Children Too Large for Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canadian residents, should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional information. http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm
69
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• A rearward-facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing child restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger airbag, which may cause severe or
fatal injury to the infant.
2
70
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• All passenger seating positions contain automatic
locking retractors. However, any seat belt system will
loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally and
• Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder
pull it tight if necessary.
belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to
bend over the front of the seat when their back is • Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
against the seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
in a rear seat.
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child
restraint:
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle
where you will use it, before you buy it.
CAUTION!
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a
sudden stop or collision, it could strike the occupants
or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.
• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower
weight and height limits.
Anchors and Tether for CHildren)
• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorrestraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may age system called LATCH. The LATCH system provides
not work when you need it.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
for the installation of the child restraint without using the
vehicle’s seat belts. The two rear seating positions have
lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating
LATCH-compatible child seats having flexible, webbingmounted lower attachments or fixed lower attachments.
Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment,
NEVER install LATCH-compatible child seats such that
two seats share a common lower anchorage. If you are
installing LATCH-compatible child restraints in adjacent
rear seating positions, you can use the LATCH anchors or
the vehicle’s seat belts. If your child restraints are not
LATCH-compatible, you can only install the child restraints using the vehicle’s seat belts. For typical installation instructions, refer to “Installing the LATCHCompatible Child Restraint System”.
Rear Seat LATCH Anchors
Child restraints systems having attachments designed to
connect to the lower anchorages are now available. Child
restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection
71
to the top tether anchorage, have been available for some
time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers will
provide add-on tether strap kits for some of their older
products. Tether anchorage kits are also available for
most older vehicles.
Rear Seat LATCH Anchors
2
72
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to
passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years, child
restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to have features for installation in
vehicles using the lap or lap/shoulder belt. They will also
have tether straps, and you are urged to take advantage
of all of the available attachments provided with your
child restraint in any vehicle.
Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are
not toys and should not be played with, and never leave
your child unattended in the vehicle.
Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
System
We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts were provided with the child restraint system.
not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars,
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
located at the rear of the seat cushion where it
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
meets the seatback, and are just visible when
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
surfaces.
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should
stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position. Access ports
to the tether anchors are located in the panel
between the rear seat and the rear window. The
tether anchors are underneath access covers in the carpet
covering the back of the seat where you see this symbol.
73
seat cover material. Then rotate the tether anchorage
cover directly behind the seat where you are placing the
child restraint, push the tether strap and hook through
the access port and down into the trunk. Open the access
cover on the carpet covering the back of the seat and
attach the tether strap hook to the anchor. Be careful to
route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
between the anchor and the child restraint. Finally,
tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat, removing slack in
the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
Many, but not all restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forwardfacing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a
hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to
means of adjusting the tension of the strap.
install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts
not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next,
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
2
74
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should
stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child.
Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are
not toys and should not be played with, and never leave
your child unattended in the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
Belts
The passenger seat belts are equipped with Automatic
Locking Retractors (ALRs), which are designed to keep
the lap portion tight around the child restraint.
The seat belt must be in the Automatic Locking Mode in
order to enable a child restraint to be tightly installed.
Refer to “Automatic Locking Mode” for further information. A locking clip should not be necessary once the
automatic locking feature is enabled. Position the shoulder and lap belt on the child restraint. The Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) is activated by first attaching
the child seat, then pulling all of the webbing out of the
retractor, then allowing the webbing to retract. As the
webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking
Mode. To release, simply unbuckle the seat belt by
depressing the button, and allow the webbing to retract
into the retractor.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
75
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the 2. Open the access port cover (A) behind the seat where
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the you are placing the child restraint.
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening
on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from the
buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt several times
to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the
release button facing out.
If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, you may need
to do something more. Disconnect the latch plate from
the buckle, turn the buckle around, and insert the latch
plate into the buckle again. If you still can’t make the
child restraint secure, try a different seating position.
To attach a child restraint tether strap:
Child Tether Access Port Cover
1. If lowered, raise the convertible top.
3. Push the tether strap and hook (B) through the access
port and down into the trunk.
NOTE: The convertible top must be in the UP position
NOTE: Route the tether strap to provide the most direct
to access the tether anchor.
path from the child seat to the anchor.
2
76
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Open the access cover (C) on the carpet covering the
back of the seat and attach the tether strap hook (D) to the
anchor.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Child Tether Anchor
5. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
77
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your VeDrive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
hicle”. NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
OILS MUST NEVER BE USED.
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
considered a normal part of the break-in and not interWide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detripreted as an indication of difficulty.
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
2
78
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
SAFETY TIPS
WARNING! (Continued)
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
(Continued)
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)
follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
79
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force Vehicle
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
Seat Belts
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
Airbag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
on while driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
2
80
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the foot well of
your vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal
area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that
they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the
pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other
ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on
top of already installed floor mats. Additional
floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size
of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that
have been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver foot well while the vehicle is moving.
Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly
installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss
of control of the vehicle.
81
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
the Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall for
cuts and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness.
Check the tires (including spare) for proper pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
2
82
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Convertible Top Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
▫ Power Convertible Top Usage Precautions . . . . 88
▫ Cargo Shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
▫ Power Convertible Top Controls . . . . . . . . . . . 94
▫ Lowering The Power Convertible Top . . . . . . . 95
▫ Raising The Power Convertible Top . . . . . . . . 96
▫ Wind Stop — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
▫ Emergency Bypass Mode (To Raise The Top
Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
䡵 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
▫ Vanity Mirror — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
▫ Power Convertible Top Operation And
Warning Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 䡵 Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 112
3
84
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 Voice Command — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 112
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . 124
䡵 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
▫ Headlights With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
▫ Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
▫ Recliner Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
▫ Lumbar Support — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 116
▫ Easy Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
▫ Adjusting Active Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . 118
䡵 To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
䡵 Lights
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
▫ Headlights And Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . 124
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
▫ Headlight Time Delay — If Equipped . . . . . . 125
▫ Instrument Panel Dimmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . 127
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
▫ Battery Saver Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
85
䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . 130
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 138
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
▫ Programming HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
▫ Headlights With Wipers (Available With
Auto Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
▫ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming . . . . 142
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
䡵 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . 134
䡵 Electronic Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
䡵 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
▫ To Set a Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
䡵 Cigar Lighter And Ash Receiver —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
䡵 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
▫ Front Seat Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
▫ Rear Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
3
86
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 䡵 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
▫ Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
▫ Sliding Armrest — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 151
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONVERTIBLE TOP OPERATION
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew on the top material:
• Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they can damage the top material. Also, increased water pressure may force past the weather strips.
• Remove any standing water from the top and dry
the surface before opening it. Operating the top,
opening a door or lowering a window while the
top is wet may allow water to drip into the
vehicles interior.
• Use care when washing the vehicle, water pressure
directed at the weather strip seals may cause water
to leak into the vehicles interior.
87
WARNING!
The convertible top does not provide the structural
protection that a reinforced metal roof does and the
fabric top cannot be expected to prevent the ejection
of the occupants in a collision. Therefore, it is important that all occupants wear their seat belts at all
times. Death or serious injuries could occur if you are
ejected from the vehicle during a collision.
You can lower or raise the power convertible top from
inside the vehicle or lower the top remotely using the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. Either operation
takes approximately 30 seconds. The entire process, including unlatching or latching the top at the windshield
header is automatic.
The top does take up some space in the trunk when
retracted. However, the trunk will still hold a significant
amount of cargo.
3
88
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When operating the power convertible top, the trunk lid
will pivot at the rear of the vehicle, swing open by the
rear window, and then pivot backward. This allows room
for the top to retract into or unfold from its stowage area
in the trunk.
Spring-loaded flipper doors, which provide clearance for
the linkage, close off notches in the quarter trim panels
when the top is down.
Power Convertible Top Usage Precautions
NOTE:
When lowering the top, the system extends the hard
• The convertible top will not operate unless the vehicle
tonneau cover, which stows conveniently underneath the
is stationary, the cargo shield is positioned correctly,
trunk lid. The tonneau cover closes the area between the
and the trunk lid is closed and latched. In addition, the
rear seats and the trunk lid to conceal the top when
system prohibits lowering the top when ambient temstowed.
perature is at 32°F (0°C) or lower, However, the system
allows you to raise the top at ambient temperatures as
When raising the top, the system retracts the hard
low as 0°F (-18°C).
tonneau cover back into its stowage area underneath the
trunk lid.
• Do not attempt to lower the top when frost, ice, or
snow may be present, this could cause damage or
To complete either operation, the trunk lid returns to its
prevent the top from stowing completely.
normal position and then latches.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The Power Top Control Module (PTCM) monitors and
controls lowering and raising of the top. A series of
micro-switches verify that operations are complete
before allowing the next stage of lowering or raising
operation.
• Opening and closing the top consecutively without the
engine running may run the battery down.
• If a fluttering noise is heard from the rear seat belts
while driving with the top down, safely bring the
vehicle to a stop and buckle the rear seat belts over the
empty seats. This will keep tension on the seat belts
and remove the fluttering condition.
89
CAUTION!
• Correctly position the cargo shield in the trunk
before stowing the top. Doing so closes a switch
that allows top operation (stowing) to proceed. If
the switch is not closed, a warning message displays in the instrument cluster to notify the driver.
• Always place items carefully into the trunk.
• Do not push items too far into the trunk, particularly when the top is retracted into its stowage area
in the trunk.
• Do not use the area near the tonneau cover for
storage.
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage
to the convertible top components, trunk contents,
and the vehicle interior.
3
90
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
Before operating the power top:
• Always check the tonneau cover area to be sure
that it is clear of debris or other items.
• Make sure the ambient temperature is above 32°F
(0°C).
• Never attempt to lower a frozen convertible top.
Wait until the top is thawed before lowering it into
the stowage compartment. Lowering a cloth top at
temperatures below 32°F (0°C) should be avoided.
• Make sure the convertible top is dry before lowering it into the stowage compartment. Lowering
the top when damp, wet, or dirty can cause stains,
mildew, and damage to the inside of your vehicle.
• Make sure there is sufficient clearance of at least
7.5 ft. (2.2 m) for the top to move up.
(Continued)
• To prevent striking a low ceiling or automatic door
opener with the top, it is strongly recommended
that you do not operate the power top inside a
garage or parking structure.
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage
to the convertible top components, trunk contents,
and the vehicle interior.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the convertible top components, trunk contents, and
the vehicle interior:
• Do not operate the power top with the hydraulic
pump valve open.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
91
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not allow the top to remain in the suspended
position. After approximately 10 minutes in the
suspended position, the hydraulic pressure will
release, which will allow the top and the trunk lid
to lower. Pressing the power top switch will cancel
this operation.
• Always use a normal ice scraper to remove snow or
ice from the rear window. Use of a sharp object or
other tools could scratch the fabric or panels when
removing snow or ice.
• Always close the top when leaving your vehicle so
as not to leave the interior exposed to potentially
damaging outdoor conditions.
• Do not leave the top lowered for several weeks at
a time. Close it occasionally to prevent discoloration in the folds of the fabric and to allow the
creases to smooth out. This is especially important
if the top was stowed when not completely dry.
(Continued)
WARNING!
Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries
that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and
others around you:
• Before operating the power top, make sure that no
moving parts of the convertible top can injure a
person or animal.
(Continued)
3
92
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never place any extremities (hands, feet, etc.) near
the convertible top components, the upper windshield area, the shelf area behind the rear seats, or
the convertible top stowage area while raising or
lowering the convertible top.
• When using the power top button on RKE transmitter, if potential danger exists while lowering
the top, release the button immediately to interrupt the operation.
• When using the power top switch on the instrument panel, if potential danger exists while lowering the top, release the switch immediately to
interrupt the operation.
• When using the power top switch on the instrument panel, if potential danger exists while raising
the top, release the switch immediately to interrupt the operation.
• Only drive the vehicle with the convertible top
completely closed and latched or fully lowered
into its stowage compartment.
• Do not operate the power top when the vehicle is
in motion.
Cargo Shield
The cargo shield is located in the trunk. Before lowering
the convertible top, you must unfold the cargo shield and
seat the tabs at each end of the cargo shield in the V slots
(Continued)
in the trunk liner. Doing so closes a switch that allows top
operation. If the switch is not closed, a warning message
displays in the instrument cluster to notify the driver.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
93
Positioning the Cargo Shield for Top Operation
Pull the cargo shield toward you to begin unfolding the
panels. Grasp the handle in the center of the outermost
(top) panel and raise the cargo shield. Then, align and
seat the tabs at each end of the cargo shield in the V slots
in the trunk liner as shown in the illustration.
3
CAUTION!
Do NOT place items on cargo protector. Items placed
on cargo protector will interfere with the top during
operation and cause excessive damage to the top.
Cargo Shield
Positioning the Cargo Shield for Cargo Storage
To maximize the storage space in the trunk, the cargo
shield can be stowed in the forward portion of the trunk.
94
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To stow the cargo shield, grasp the handle of the upright
panel of the cargo shield, lifting the pins out of the V slots
in the trunk trim. Continue folding the upright panel
forward onto the horizontal panel, then grasp both
panels and lift them to the forward, upright position in
the trunk.
Stowed Cargo Shield
NOTE: The convertible top will NOT operate with the
cargo shield in the stowed position.
Power Convertible Top Controls
The power top switch is located on the instrument panel
to the left of the steering column.
Power Top Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
95
There is also a power top button on the Remote Keyless Lowering the Power Convertible Top
Entry (RKE) transmitter for remotely lowering the power
Using the Power Top Switch
convertible top.
NOTE: The power top switch will operate when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON or ACC position and
when in the power accessory delay.
There are two Top Down switch positions.
Press and hold the switch to the first detent.
The system will lower all fully raised windows
approximately 0.5 in (10 mm), lower the top to
its fully retracted position, and then raise the windows.
Press and hold the switch to the second detent. The
system will lower all four windows and the top to their
fully retracted positions.
Power Top Button
The driver has to press and hold the convertible top
switch during the entire opening cycle, if there is an
obstruction and the driver is alerted, the convertible top
operation can be stopped by releasing the switch.
3
96
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Press and hold the switch in the Top Up
position until the operation of raising the top
NOTE: Steps 1 – 3 must be performed within five
and latching it is complete, which is indicated
seconds.
by the system raising the windows and dis1. Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE playing “TOP DONE” in the odometer or “CONVERTIBLE TOP COMPLETE” in the EVIC (if equipped).
transmitter.
Using the Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter
2. Press and release the POWER TOP button Using the Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter
You cannot use the power top button on the RKE
on the RKE transmitter.
transmitter to raise the power convertible top. You must
use the power top switch inside the vehicle to perform
3. Press and hold the POWER TOP button until the this operation.
Power Top and All Windows Down feature is complete.
Raising the Power Convertible Top
Using the Power Top Switch
NOTE: The power top switch will operate when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON or ACC position and
when in the power accessory delay.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Manually
Closing the power convertible top manually is a complicated and physically demanding procedure, and it requires a special tool to do so. In the event that you
experience a malfunction when operating the power
convertible top:
97
Wind Stop — If Equipped
The Wind Stop installs in the backseat area of the vehicle.
The Wind Stop will not interfere with power top operation. Therefore, it can remain installed when the top is up.
However, when not in use, the Wind Stop folds to allow
for convenient storage underneath the cargo shield in the
trunk.
1. Read all of the Notes, Cautions, and Warning found
under “Power Convertible Top Usage Precautions” to NOTE: It is recommended that you lower the convertverify all operating conditions are met.
ible top before installing or removing the Wind Stop.
2. Check for Operation and Warning Messages as de- Installing the Wind Stop
scribed under “Power Convertible Top Operation and
1. Remove the Wind Stop from the trunk.
Warning Messages.” If applicable, perform the related
2. Unfold the Wind Stop framework.
action to correct the condition present.
3. If Steps 1 and 2 do not resolve the problem, refer to 3. Lay the small frame (1) flat on top of the large frame
(2) and snap the two frames together by engaging the
“Emergency Bypass Mode”.
frame lock (3).
3
98
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The frames must lie flat on each other in order to 4. Pivot the small frame (1) away from the large frame (2)
snap them together.
until the pivot lock (3) engages to lock the two frames in
an L shape.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
5. Unfold both stems at the rear of the large frame.
99
6. Align and insert the stems into the slot in each trim
panel.
3
100
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
7. Align the pins at the front of the large frame with the Disengage the pivot lock (1) to fold the small frame flat
hole in each trim panel. Slide the pins outward until fully onto the large frame. Disengage the frame lock (2) to
disconnect the small frame from the large frame.
extended into each hole.
Removing and Storing the Wind Stop
Reverse the installation procedure to remove, fold, and
store the Wind Stop. However, note the following before
doing so:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
101
(EVIC) – if equipped, or in the Odometer for vehicles not
Power Convertible Top Operation and Warning
equipped with the EVIC. Refer to the following chart for
Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, the PTCM dis- message related information:
plays various power convertible top operation and warning messages in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
EVIC
Message〫
EVIC
Message
Display
Time〫
CONVERT- Until OpIBLE TOP
eration is
NOT SEComplete
CURED
Odometer
Message
(< 5 mph
[8 km/
h])〫〫
TOP nOT
SECUrE
Odometer
Message
Display
Time〫〫
Until Operation is
Complete
Odometer
Message
(> 5 mph
[8 km/
h])〫〫
—
Odometer
Message
Display
Time〫〫
Chime
Condition Operator
Action
Required
—
—
The System is
Lowering
or Raising
the Top
—
3
102
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
EVIC
Message〫
EVIC
Message
Display
Time〫
CONVERT- 9 sec.
IBLE TOP
COMPLETE
SECURE
CARGO
SHIELD
9 sec.
Odometer
Message
(< 5 mph
[8 km/
h])〫〫
TOP
DONE
SET
CARGO
SHIELD
Odometer
Message
Display
Time〫〫
Display
Scrolls for
6 sec.
Display
Scrolls for
9 sec.
Odometer
Message
(> 5 mph
[8 km/
h])〫〫
—
Odometer
Message
Display
Time〫〫
Chime
Condition Operator
Action
Required
—
Single
Chime
—
—
Single
Chime
The System Completes Operation of
Lowering
or Raising
the Top
The Top
Fails to
Move
When Operating the
Power Top
Control
—
Position
the Cargo
Shield in
the Trunk
to Allow
Top Operation
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
EVIC
Message〫
EVIC
Message
Display
Time〫
CONVERT- Until OpIBLE TOP
eration is
NOT SEComplete
CURED
Odometer
Message
(< 5 mph
[8 km/
h])〫〫
TOP nOT
SECUrE
Odometer
Message
Display
Time〫〫
Until Operation is
Complete
Odometer
Message
(> 5 mph
[8 km/
h])〫〫
TOP nOT
SECUrE
103
Odometer
Message
Display
Time〫〫
Chime
Condition Operator
Action
Required
Until Operation is
Complete
Single
Chime
The System Fails
to Complete Operation of
Lowering
or Raising
the Top
Cycle
Power Top
Control
3
104
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
EVIC
Message〫
EVIC
Message
Display
Time〫
SPEED
9 sec.
TOO HIGH
Odometer
Message
(< 5 mph
[8 km/
h])〫〫
SPEED
TOO
HIGH
Odometer
Message
Display
Time〫〫
Display
Scrolls for
9 sec.
Odometer
Message
(> 5 mph
[8 km/
h])〫〫
TOP
Odometer
Message
Display
Time〫〫
Chime
Condition Operator
Action
Required
6 sec.
Single
Chime
You Are
Operating
the Power
Top at a
Vehicle
Speed
Greater
Than
0 mph
(0 km/h)
The Top
Will Not
Operate
Unless the
Vehicle is
Stationary.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
EVIC
Message〫
EVIC
Message
Display
Time〫
TRUNK
AJAR
Continuous
CONVERT- 6 sec.
IBLE TOP
MALFUNCTION
Odometer
Message
(< 5 mph
[8 km/
h])〫〫
DECK
TOP FAIL
Odometer
Message
Display
Time〫〫
Continuous
Display
Scrolls for
6 Seconds
Odometer
Message
(> 5 mph
[8 km/
h])〫〫
DECK
TOP
105
Odometer
Message
Display
Time〫〫
Chime
Condition Operator
Action
Required
Continuous
Single
Chime
The Trunk
Lid is Unlatched or
Open
6 sec.
Single
Chime
The Top
Will Not
Operate
Unless the
Trunk Lid
is Closed
The PTCM Refer to
Activated Foot Note
the System 〫〫〫
LOCKOUT
Feature
3
106
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
EVIC
Message〫
EVIC
Message
Display
Time〫
Odometer
Message
(< 5 mph
[8 km/
h])〫〫
CONVERT- Until Fault TOP FAIL
IBLE TOP
is No
MALLonger
FUNCTION Detected
or Repaired
Odometer
Message
Display
Time〫〫
Display
Scrolls until Fault is
No Longer
Detected
or Repaired
Odometer
Message
(> 5 mph
[8 km/
h])〫〫
TOP
Odometer
Message
Display
Time〫〫
Chime
Display
Single
Flashes
Chime
until Fault
is No
Longer
Detected
or Repaired
Condition Operator
Action
Required
The PTCM
Activated
the System
LOCKOUT
Feature
See your
authorized
dealer for
service
〫 If so equipped.
〫〫 For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC.
〫〫〫 The PTCM will lockout the power convertible top system if the vehicle charging system is malfunctioning, or the battery is run down, or the hydraulic pump is overheating. In addition, the system prohibits lowering the top when ambient temperature is at 0°F (-18°C) or lower and raising the top when ambient temperature
is below -40°F (-40°C).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
107
• If you are trying to lower the top and ambient temperature is 0°F (-18°C) or lower, wait until the temperature
rises and the top is thawed and dry before operating the power top. A soft top should not be lowered at temperatures below 32°F (0°C).
• If you are trying to raise the top and ambient temperature is below -40°F (-40°C), wait until the temperature
rises before operating the power top.
• If the vehicle charging system is malfunctioning, see your authorized dealer for service.
• If the battery is run down, have it recharged and tested at your authorized dealer.
• Hydraulic pump overheating can occur if you lower and raise the top consecutively (usually more than six or
seven times depending upon the ambient temperature). Wait at least five minutes before operating the power
top again. NOTE: If lockout occurs due to hydraulic pump overheating, the system will allow you to raise the
top without waiting five minutes. However, do so only if necessary.
3
108
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Emergency Bypass Mode (To Raise the Top Only)
This procedure is only to be used to raise the top when
the top cannot be returned to the UP (raised) position by
pressing the POWER TOP switch or is in a position in
which the vehicle cannot be driven. Please follow these
emergency bypass instructions to return the top to the UP
(raised) position.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Using the Emergency Bypass Mode could potentially damage the convertible top and should only
be used to raise the power top to the UP (raised)
position when the normal top operation is not
functioning.
Press the POWER TOP switch in the Top Up direction If damage starts to occur while in the Emergency Bypass
five times within two seconds and hold the switch in the Mode, immediately release the power top switch and see
Top Up position for a minimum of two minutes.
your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
• Once this procedure has been completed and the
top is in the UP (raised) position, see your authorized dealer. DO NOT exceed 40 mph (64 km/h).
(Continued)
NOTE: This procedure may take more time to fully raise
and close the power top. It is not uncommon to see
delays of up to 30 seconds before operation begins.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
109
MIRRORS
Automatic Dimming Mirror
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
next to the button will illuminate to indicate when the
dimming feature is activated.
3
1 — Auto Dimming Mirror Power Indicator
2 — On/Off Switch
3 — Auto Dimming Mirror Sensor
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
110
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
Power Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s door
trim. A rotary knob selects the left mirror, right mirror or
off position.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Power Mirror Adjust Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
111
After selecting a mirror, move the knob in the same Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
direction you want the mirror to move. When finished,
feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear
return the knob to the center “O” (Off) position to guard
window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in
against accidentally moving a mirror position.
“Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Mirror Directions
3
112
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Vanity Mirror — If Equipped
Uconnect™ Phone — IF EQUIPPED
A vanity mirror is attached to the inside face of the sun Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
visor. To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward Manual located on the DVD for further details.
and flip the mirror cover upward.
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
Voice Command can be initiated by pressing the VR
located on the radio or steering wheel
button
controls (if equipped).
Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ Phone
User Manual located on the DVD for further details.
Vanity Mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
113
SEATS
Seats are a primary part of the Occupant Restraint System
of the vehicle. They need to be used properly for safe
operation of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• DO NOT allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Power Seats
The power seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat
near the floor. Use the switch to move the seat up, down,
forward, rearward, or to tilt the seat.
3
Power Seat Switch
114
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might
not be properly adjusted and you could be injured.
Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under any seat as it may
cause damage to the seat controls.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
The driver and front passenger seats are heated. The
controls for each heater are located in the instrument
panel switch bank above the climate controls.
After turning the ignition ON, you can choose from High,
Low, or Off heat settings. Amber indicator lights in each
switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator
lights will illuminate for High, one for Low and none for
Off.
Press the switch once to select High-level heating. Press the switch a second time to select
Low-level heating. Press the switch a third time
to shut the heating elements Off.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
115
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise
care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a
seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of
the seat.
Repeated overheating of the seat could damage the
heating element and/or degrade the material of the
seat.
3
116
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Recliner Adjustment
The recliner control is on the outboard side of the seat. To
recline the seat, lean forward slightly and lift the lever.
Then lean back to the position desired and release the
lever. To return the seatback to its normal upright position, lean forward and lift the lever. Release the lever
once the seatback is in the upright position.
Seatback Adjustment
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might
not be properly adjusted and you could be injured.
Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
Lumbar Support — If Equipped
This feature allows you to increase or decrease the
amount of lumbar support. The control lever is on the
inboard side of the seat. Turn the control lever downward
to increase and upward to decrease the desired amount
of lumbar support.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
117
3
Lumbar Support
Easy Entry Lever
Pull the lever upward to move the seat and seatback
Easy Entry System
The Easy Entry lever is located on upper seat belt anchor forward.
cover.
When returning the seat to its normal position, the
memory feature restores the seat position and seatback
recline position to their current settings.
118
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
On the driver seat, pull the lever upward to move the
seatback forward.
When returning the seatback to its normal position the
memory feature restores the seatback recline position to
its current setting.
Adjusting Active Head Restraints
Active Head Restraints can reduce the risk of injury in
the event of a rear impact. The Active Head Restraint
should be adjusted so the top of the head restraint is
located above the top of your ear.
Adjusted Head Restraint
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint (on some models, you may need to press the
push button). To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
119
For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
forward and backward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
the back of your head, pull outward on the bottom of the
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your
head.
Push Button
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
3
120
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active
Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Things to Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
NOTE:
• The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.
• Driving a vehicle with the head restraints removed
or improperly adjusted could cause serious injury
or death in the event of a collision. The head
restraints should always be checked prior to operating the vehicle and never adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Always adjust the head
restraints when the vehicle is in PARK.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable
DVD players. These items may interfere with the
operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event
of an accident and could result in serious injury or
death.
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they
are struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured, as loose cargo could contact the Active Head
Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to follow
this warning could cause personal injury if the
Active Head Restraint is deployed.
121
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
of the instrument panel.
3
Hood Release Lever
122
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and lift the secondary latch underneath the center front edge of the hood
and raise the hood.
Hood Prop Rod Hole Location
Before closing the hood, make sure to stow the prop rod
in its proper location.
Hood Safety Catch
Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open
position. Place the upper end of the prop rod in the hole
on the underside of the hood.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the center of
the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
WARNING!
123
LIGHTS
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever on the left side of the steering
column controls the operation of the headlights, parking
lights, turn signal lights, instrument panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, interior lights and fog lights
(if equipped).
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Multifunction Lever
3
124
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Headlights And Parking Lights
Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent
for parking light operation. Turn the end of the lever to
the second detent for headlight operation.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is turned to the LOCK position, a chime will sound to
alert the driver when the driver’s door is opened.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
turn the end of the multifunction lever to the AUTO
position. When the system is on, the Headlight Time
Delay feature is also on. This means the headlights will
stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position. To turn the Automatic
System off, turn the end of the multifunction lever out of
the AUTO position.
Headlight Switch
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights will turn on in the Automatic mode.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Headlights with Wipers (Available with Automatic
Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the multifunction lever is placed in the AUTO position.
In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers
are turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
The Headlights with Wipers feature can be turned on or
off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) — if equipped. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Headlight Time Delay — If Equipped
This feature is particularly useful when exiting your
vehicle in an unlit area. It provides the safety of headlight
illumination for about 90 seconds after turning the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
125
To activate the delay, turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK position while the headlights are still on. Then,
turn off the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay
interval begins when you turn off the headlights. Only
the headlights will illuminate during this time.
If you turn the headlights, parking lights, or ignition
switch ON again, the system will cancel the delay.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
turn off in the normal manner.
The Headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles
equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
3
126
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Rotate the center portion of the lever to the extreme
bottom position to fully dim the instrument panel lights
and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a
door is opened.
Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the
brightness of the instrument panel lights when the parking lights or headlights are on.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the next
detent position to brighten the odometer and radio when
the parking lights or headlights are on.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the last
detent to turn on the interior lighting.
Dimmer Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
127
NOTE: The front fog lights will only operate with the
Fog Lights — If Equipped
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking headlights on low beam. Selecting high beam headlights
lights or the low beam headlights and pull out on will turn off the front fog lights.
the end of the multifunction lever.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The high beam headlights will turn on as Daytime
Running Lights (DRL) and operate at lower intensity
whenever the ignition is ON, the engine is running, the
headlight switch is off, the parking brake is released and
the shift lever is in any position except PARK.
NOTE: The Daytime Running Lights will turn off
automatically when a turn signal is in operation and turn
on again when the turn signal is not operating.
Front Fog Light Control
3
128
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
toward you, to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and
remain on until the lever is released.
Turn Signal Control
NOTE: If the multifunction lever is held in the FlashTo-Pass position for more than 15 seconds, the high
beams will shut off. If this occurs, wait 30 seconds before
activating the Flash-To-Pass function again.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Lights
Two courtesy/reading lights are located in the bottom of
the rearview mirror. You can turn these lights on and off
from the switches in the mirror or from the dimmer
control in the multifunction lever. These lights are also
controlled automatically by the Illuminated Entry System.
Courtesy/Reading Light Switches
129
A courtesy light is also found in the rear of the center
console. You can turn this light on and off from the
dimmer control in the multifunction lever. This light is
also controlled automatically by the Illuminated Entry
System.
Battery Saver Feature
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the
interior lights were switched on manually or are on
because a door is open.
3
130
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer control lever is
located on the right side of the steering column.
Changing Wiper Speeds
NOTE: The wipers will automatically return to the
“Park” position if you turn the ignition switch OFF while
they are operating. The wipers will resume operation
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
Rotate the end of the lever to the LO position for when you turn the ignition switch to the ON position
low-speed wiper operation, or to the HI position for again.
high-speed wiper operation.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than off.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper system when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause
between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the windshield wiper/washer control lever to the first detent, and
then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay
interval. There are five delay settings, which allow you to
131
regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle
every second to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds
between cycles.
3
Changing Intermittent Settings
132
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to an accident. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with defroster before and during windshield washer use.
Mist Feature
Push downward on the windshield wiper/washer control lever to activate a single wipe cycle to clear the
windshield of road mist or spray from a passing vehicle.
The wipers will continue to operate until you release the
lever.
Mist Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Headlights with Wipers (Available with Auto
Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the multifunction lever (on the left side of the steering
column) is placed in the AUTO position. In addition, the
headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if
they were turned on by this feature.
133
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the windshield wiper/washer
control lever toward you and hold it for as long as
washer spray is desired.
If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in
the delay range, the wipers will operate in low-speed for
two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume
the intermittent interval previously selected.
The Headlights with Wipers feature can be turned on or
If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in
off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
the off position, the wipers will operate for two wipe
(EVIC) — if equipped. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Inforcycles and then turn off.
mation Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
3
134
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control
handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of
the steering column.
To unlock the steering column, push the control handle
downward. To tilt the steering column, move the steering
wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or
shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering
column in position, pull the control handle upward until
fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
steering column is locked before driving your vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
135
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
The Electronic Speed Control lever is located on the right
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
side of the steering wheel.
vehicle set speed.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
the accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
To Activate
Push and release the ON/OFF button located on the end
of the Electronic Speed Control lever. The CRUISE indicator in the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the
system off, push and release the ON/OFF button a
second time. The CRUISE indicator will turn off. Be sure
to turn the system off when not in use.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system will automatically turn off when the ignition is turned OFF.
Electronic Speed Control Lever
3
136
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control on when not in
use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the
system or cause it to go faster than you want. You
could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system off when you are not using it.
To Set a Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
reaches the speed desired, press down on the lever and
release SET DECEL. Release the accelerator and the
vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, or pulling the Electronic
Speed Control lever toward you (CANCEL), or normal
brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate
the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set
speed from memory. Pressing the ON/OFF button or
turning off the ignition erases the set speed from
memory.
To Resume Speed
If you deactivated the Electronic Speed Control without
erasing the set speed from memory and your vehicle
speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h) you can resume the
previous set speed. To do so, push the lever up and
release RESUME ACCEL, and then remove your foot
NOTE:
• The vehicle must be traveling at least 25 mph from the accelerator pedal.
(40 km/h) for the Electronic Speed Control to set.
To Vary the Speed Setting
• The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can inon level ground before pressing the lever SET DECEL. crease speed by pushing up and holding the RESUME
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ACCEL lever. If the lever is continually held in the
RESUME ACCEL position, the set speed will continue to
increase until the lever is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph
(2 km/h) speed increase. Each time the lever is tapped,
speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will
increase speed by 3 mph (5 km/h), etc.
To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is
set, push down and hold the SET DECEL lever. If the
lever is continually held in the SET DECEL position, the
set speed will continue to decrease until the lever is
released. Release the lever when the desired speed is
reached, and the new set speed will be established.
137
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control. An accident could be the result.
Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic
or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered, or
slippery.
To Accelerate for Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
Tapping the SET DECEL lever once will result in a 1 mph
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
(2 km/h) speed decrease. Each time the button is tapped,
moderate hills is normal.
speed decreases.
3
138
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so The HomeLink威 buttons that are located in the headliner
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed or sun visor designate the three different HomeLink威
Control.
channels.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control. An accident could be the result.
Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic
or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or
slippery.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink威 replaces up to three remote controls (handHomeLink威 Buttons
held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage NOTE: HomeLink威 is disabled when the Vehicle Secudoor openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security rity Alarm is active.
systems. The HomeLink威 unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the universal transceiver.
Do not train the transceiver if people, pets or other
objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transceiver with a garage door opener that has
a “stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal
safety standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety
features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the
Internet at www.HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance.
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can
cause serious injury or death.
139
Programming HomeLink姞
Before You Begin
If you have not trained any of the HomeLink威 buttons,
erase all channels before you begin training.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for up
to 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes.
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the
handheld transmitter of the device that is being copied to
HomeLink威 for more efficient training and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage
when programming.
Begin Programming
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Hold the battery side of the handheld transmitter
away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program.
3
140
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Place the handheld transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) away • After training a HomeLink威 channel, if the garage
from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program while
door does not operate with HomeLink威 and the gakeeping the indicator light in view.
rage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the
garage door opener may have a rolling code. If so,
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen
proceed to Step 5 “Programming A Rolling Code
HomeLink威 button and the handheld transmitter button
System.”
until the HomeLink威 indicator changes from a slow to a
rapidly blinking light, then release both the HomeLink威 4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink威 button
and handheld transmitter buttons.
and observe the indicator light.
Watch for the HomeLink威 indicator to change flash rates. If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is
When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to complete and the garage door (or device) should activate
30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may when the HomeLink威 button is pressed.
open and close while you train.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and
NOTE:
then turns to a constant light, proceed to Step 5 “Pro• Some gate operators and garage door openers may gramming A Rolling Code System.”
require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in
5. Programming A Rolling Code System
the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming” section.
At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “Learn” or “Training” button.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
141
This can usually be found where the hanging antenna 6. Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING
wire is attached to the garage door opener motor. It is button. The name and color of the button may vary by
NOT the button normally used to open and close the manufacturer.
door.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink威 button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and
activates, programming is complete.
If the device does not activate, press the button a third
time (for two seconds) to complete the training.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
3
142
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Using HomeLink威
To operate, press and release the programmed
HomeLink威 button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator,
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
etc.,). The handheld transmitter of the device may also be
used at any time.
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink威
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner.
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink威 Button
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
follow these steps:
door or gate motor.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
If you are having difficulties programming a garage door
opener or a gate operator, replace “Programming
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until
HomeLink威” Step 3, with the following:
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button,
while you press and release (“cycle”), your handheld
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Programtransmitter every two seconds until HomeLink威 has
ming HomeLink威 Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
143
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indica- Troubleshooting Tips
tor light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here
are some of the most common solutions:
trained.
If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in • Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
at this time.
• Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
Then proceed with Step 4 under “Programming
HomeLink威,” earlier in this section.
• Did you unplug the device for training, and remember
to plug it back in?
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
in your vehicle.
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
General Information
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
erased.
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when two conditions:
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
3
144
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. This device must accept any interference that may be NOTE: Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
received including interference that may cause undesired (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will
operation.
need to be replaced.
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with The instrument panel power outlet, located below the
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not climate control knobs, has power available only when the
expressly approved by the party responsible for com- ignition is ON. This power outlet will also operate a
pliance could void the user’s authority to operate the conventional cigar lighter unit.
device.
NOTE: If desired, the instrument panel power outlet
• The term IC before the certification/registration num- can be converted by your authorized dealer to provide
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical power with the ignition switch while in the LOCK
position.
specifications were met.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
There are two 12 Volt (13 Amp) electrical power outlets
on this vehicle. Both of the power outlets are protected by
a fuse.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
145
3
Instrument Panel Power Outlet
The center console power outlet is powered directly from
the battery (power available at all times). Items plugged
into this power outlet may discharge the battery and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
Center Console
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
(Continued)
146
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER — IF
EQUIPPED
An optional ash receiver is available from your authorized dealer and will fit in the center console front
cupholder.
147
CAUTION!
For vehicles equipped with the heated and cooled
cupholder, locate the cup holder ash receiver in the
forward cupholder.
The optional ash receiver also comes with a cigar lighter.
You may use the power outlet, located in the instrument
panel below the climate control knobs, or in the bottom of
the console compartment, for this cigar lighter.
Ash Receiver
3
148
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CUPHOLDERS
Front Seat Cupholder
The cupholder in the center console will accommodate
either two large size cups or two 20 oz. (.5 L) bottles or
cans. The one-piece insert can be removed easily for
cleaning. An optional removable ashtray may be located
in one of the cupholders.
Rear Seat Cupholders
Cupholders for the rear seat occupants are located in the
armrests. Each cupholder is capable of holding up to a
20 oz. (.5 L) bottle or can.
Rear Seat Cupholder
Front Cupholders
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
149
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are place in the cupholder,
they can spill when the door is closed, burning the
occupants. Be careful when closing the doors to avoid
injury.
3
CONSOLE FEATURES
Storage
The center console contains a cubby bin with flip-down
cover located below the climate controls. This compartment also contains a 12 Volt electrical outlet.
Cubby Bin
WARNING!
Two separate storage compartments are also located
underneath the armrest.
Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on
the center console. A fire leading to bodily injury
could result.
150
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The top compartment holds small items, such as a pen
and note pad, while the larger bottom compartment will
hold CDs and alike. The bottom compartment also contains a 12 Volt power outlet and a molded-in coin holder
(designed to hold various size coins). The console’s front
opening lid allows for easy access to these compartments.
NOTE:
• A notch in the side of the console base allows for use
of a cellular phone while it is plugged into the power
outlet with the armrest latched down.
• The power outlet can also energize the cigar lighter in
the optional cup holder ash receiver.
1 — Release button for top compartment
2 — Release button for bottom compartment
3 — Top Compartment
4 — Bottom Compartment. You can access this compartment
directly, without first exposing the upper compartment, by operating the Release Button for the bottom compartment with the
armrest down.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
151
Sliding Armrest — If Equipped
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
On some models the center console armrest slides forRear Window Defroster
ward and rearward for added user comfort.
The rear window defroster button is located on the
climate control (Mode) knob. Press this button to
turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside
mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will
illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of
operation, press the button a second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
Arm Rest
3
152
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
䡵 Instrument Cluster
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
䡵 Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . 158
䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) –
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
▫ Oil Change Required — If Equipped . . . . . . 174
▫ Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
▫ Compass Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
▫ Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
䡵 Setting The Analog Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
䡵 Media Center 230 (REQ) — AM/FM Stereo
Radio And 6–Disc CD/DVD Changer
(MP3/WMA AUX Jack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . 183
▫ Operation Instructions - (Disc Mode For CD
And MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-Video) . . . 191
▫ Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files . . . . . . . 193
4
154
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ List Button (Disc Mode For
MP3/WMA Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
▫ Info Button (Disc Mode For MP3/WMA
Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
䡵 Media Center 730N/430 (RER/REN/RBZ) —
AM/FM Stereo Radio And CD/DVD/HDD/
NAV — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
▫ Operating Instructions — Voice Command
System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
▫ Operating Instructions — Uconnect™ Phone
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
▫ Clock Setting Procedure — RBZ Radio . . . . . 198
▫ Clock Setting Procedure —
RER/REN Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
䡵 Media Center 130 (RES) — AM/FM Stereo
Radio With CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack). . . . . . . 202
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 202
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . 210
䡵 Media Center 130 (RES/RSC) — AM/FM
Stereo Radio With CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack)
And Sirius Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 211
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 222
▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 222
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
155
▫ Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone
(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
䡵 Remote Sound System Controls —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
䡵 Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If
Equipped (REN/REQ/RER/RBZ/RES Radios
Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
▫ Right-Hand Switch Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
▫ System Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius
Identification Number (ESN/SID) . . . . . . . . . 224
▫ Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite)
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
▫ Satellite Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
▫ Reception Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
▫ Operating Instructions - Uconnect™
Multimedia (Satellite) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
▫ Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone
(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
▫ Left-Hand Switch Functions For Radio
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
▫ Left-Hand Switch Functions For Media (i.e.,
CD) Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
䡵 CD/DVD Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
䡵 Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . . . . . . . 230
䡵 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
▫ Manual Heating And Air Conditioning . . . . . 230
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
4
156
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1
2
3
4
5
— Air Outlet
— Side Window Demister Outlet
— Instrument Cluster
— Ignition Switch
— Analog Clock
6 — Radio
7 — Passenger Airbag
8 — Glove Compartment
9 — Heated Seat Switch – If Equipped
10 — Electronic Stability Control Off Button
– If Equipped
11 — Hazard Switch
12 — Storage Compartment
13 — Climate Control
14 — Trunk Release Button
15 — Power Top Switch
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
157
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
4
158
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature
control to maximum heat, the Mode control to Floor and
1. Temperature Gauge
the Fan control to High. This allows the heater core to act
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperaas a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
ture. Any reading below the red area of the gauge shows
from the engine cooling system.
that the engine cooling system is operating properly. The
gauge pointer may show a higher than normal tempera- 2. Fuel Door Reminder
This is a reminder that the Fuel Filler Door is
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, in
located on the left side of the vehicle.
heavy stop and go traffic, or when towing a trailer.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark, the instrument
cluster will sound a chime. Pull over and stop the vehicle.
Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the
pointer remains on the H (red) mark, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service.
3. Fuel Gauge
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the
pointer will show the level of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank.
4. Speedometer
There are steps that you can take to slow down an
Indicates the vehicle speed in miles per hour (MPH) and
impending overheat condition. If your air conditioning is
kilometers per hour (km/h).
on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to
the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
159
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
5. Low Fuel Light
When the fuel level drops to approximately 2.0 gal- Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
lons (7.6 Liters), the fuel symbol will light and a
7. Airbag Warning Light
single chime will sound.
The light comes on and remains on for six to
NOTE: This light will remain on until a minimum of
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
switch is first turned ON. If the light does not
approximately 3.0 gallons (11.3 Liters) of fuel is added.
turn on during starting, stays on, or turns on
6. Charging System Light
while driving, have the system inspected by an authoThis light shows the status of the electrical chargrized dealer. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things
ing system. The light should come on briefly when
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further inforthe ignition is first turned on and remain on briefly as a
mation.
bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s electrical devices, 8. Seat Belt Reminder Light
such as the Front Fog Lights or Rear Window Defroster.
When the ignition switch is first turned ON, this
If the Charging System Light remains on, it means that
light will come on for about six seconds. A chime
will sound if you have not pulled the shoulder belt
the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See your local out of the retractor. This is a reminder to “buckle up”. If
authorized dealer.
4
160
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
you do not buckle up, the light will remain on. Refer to 10. Engine Temperature Warning Light
“Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before StartThis light warns of an overheated engine condition. If the engine is critically hot, a warning chime
ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
will sound 10 times. After the chime turns off, the
9. Oil Pressure Warning Light
engine will still be critically hot until the light goes out.
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light will come on and remain on when the 11. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
ignition switch is turned from the OFF to the ON
position, and the light will turn off after the engine is
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on, it may
started. If the bulb does not come on during starting,
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
If the light comes on and remains on while driving, stop
the anti-lock brake system.
the vehicle and shut off the engine. DO NOT OPERATE
THE VEHICLE UNTIL THE CAUSE IS CORRECTED. The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
The light does not show the quantity of oil in the engine.
system. Failure of either half of the dual brake system is
This can be determined using the procedure shown in
indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on
“Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
161
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light
will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
to the ABS system is required.
cornering maneuvers which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked
the brake fluid level checked.
by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to
the ON position. The light should illuminate for approxiIf brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necesmately three seconds. The light should then turn off
sary.
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
WARNING!
inspected by an authorized dealer.
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is dangerThe light also will turn on when the parking brake is
ous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will
applied with the ignition switch in the ON position.
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have an
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
Vehicles equipped with Anti-Lock brakes (ABS), are also
equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD).
4
162
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the same as it was before the repair or service. If s/he
cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero, and
a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the
mileage was before the repair or service. It is a good idea
for you to make a record of the odometer reading before
the repair/service, so that you can be sure that it is
13. Shift Lever Indicator
properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
the odometer must be reset at zero.
instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the
automatic transmission.
The two trip odometers show individual trip mileage. To
switch from odometer to trip odometers, press and
NOTE: You must apply the brakes before shifting from
release the Trip Odometer button. To reset a trip odomPARK.
eter, display the desired trip odometer to be reset then
push and hold the button until the display resets (ap14. Odometer / Trip Odometer Display Area
The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has proximately 2 seconds). Refer to “Trip Odometer Button”
been driven. U.S. Federal regulations require that upon for additional information.
transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the
purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been
driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced,
the repair technician should leave the odometer reading
12. Tachometer
The silver area of the scale shows the permissible engine
revolutions-per-minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear range.
Before reaching the red area, ease up on the accelerator to
prevent engine damage.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
163
Vehicle Odometer Messages
LoW TirE
When the appropriate conditions exist, the odometer will When the appropriate condition exists, the odometer
display the following messages:
display will toggle between LoW and TirE for three
cycles.
door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door Ajar HOTOIL
deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trunk Ajar When this message is displayed there is a transmission
TOP nOT SECUrE . . . . . . . Convertible Top Not Secure over-temperature condition. When this condition occurs,
LoW TirE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Tire Pressure the “HOTOIL” message will be displayed in the odomHOTOIL . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission Oil Temperature eter along with a chime.
Exceeds Safe Threshold
gASCAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Cap Fault NOTE: When this message is displayed, bring the
CHAngE OIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Change Required vehicle to a stop and idle the engine in park until the
message clears. Raising the idle of the engine slightly will
NOTE: If the instrument cluster is equipped with the
help speed up the cooling.
optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC),
then all warnings including ”Low Tire,” “Door Ajar” and gASCAP
“Trunk Ajar” will only display in the EVIC. (Refer to If the vehicle diagnostic system detects a leak or change
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” for spe- in the evaporative system, or the fuel filler cap is loose,
cific messages).
improperly installed, or damaged, the words “gASCAP”
will display in the odometer display area. If this occurs,
4
164
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer reset button to turn off the “gASCAP” message.
(Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic System — OBDII” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information). If
the problem continues, the message will appear the next
time the vehicle is started. See your authorized dealer
service center as soon as possible.
To turn off the message temporarily, press and release the
Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster. To reset
the oil change indicator system (after performing the
scheduled maintenance) perform the following procedure:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not
start the engine).
CHAngE OIL
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly 3 times
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
within 10 seconds.
indicator system. The “CHAngE OIL” message will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
change indicator system is duty cycle based, which
reset. If necessary repeat this procedure.
means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate
dependent upon your personal driving style.
4. For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
Information Center (EVIC)”.
time you turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
165
Dual Trip Odometer — If Equipped
15. Cruise Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator shows that the Electronic Speed Press and release this button to change the display from
odometer to “Trip A.” Press and release it a second time
Control System is ON.
to change the display to “Trip B.” Press and release it a
16. Odometer/Trip Odometer Reset Button
third time to change the display back to the odometer.
Single Trip Odometer
To reset the trip odometer, first display the trip mileage
Press and release this button to change the display from
that you want to reset, “Trip A” or “Trip B.” Then push
odometer to trip odometer. The word “Trip” displays to
and hold the button (approximately 2 seconds) until the
show that the odometer is in Trip Mode. Press and release
display resets to 0 miles (kilometers). The odometer must
the button again to change the display back to the
be in Trip Mode to reset the trip odometer.
odometer.
17. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Indicator Light
To reset the trip odometer, first set the display to Trip
This light informs you of a problem with the
Mode. Then push and hold the button (approximately
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
2 seconds) until the display resets to 0 miles (kilometers).
problem is detected, the light will come on
The odometer must be in Trip Mode to reset the trip
while the engine is running. If the light remains
odometer.
lit with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be
drivable and not need towing, however see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
4
166
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the light is flashing when the engine is running you 20. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrows will flash in unison with the exterior
may experience power loss, an elevated/rough idle, and
turn signal, when using the turn signal lever.
increased brake pedal effort, and your vehicle may
require towing. Immediate service is required.
21. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
The light will come on when the ignition switch is first
lights are on.
turned on and remain on approximately 15 seconds as a
bulb check. This is normal. If the light does not come on
22. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
during starting, have the system checked by an authoThis light will flash rapidly for approximately
rized dealer.
16 seconds when the alarm system is arming.
18. Position Light Indicator — If Equipped
The light will begin to flash slowly indicating
This indicator will illuminate when the park
that the system is armed. The light will stop
lights or headlights are turned on.
flashing when the vehicle is disarmed.
19. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control system (ESC) has been turned off by the
driver.
23. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light — If Equipped
This light monitors the ABS. This light will
come on when the ignition key is turned to the
ON position and may stay on for approximately three seconds.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
167
If the ABS light remains on or comes on during driving, 24. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Malfunction
it indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Malfunction Indicator Light” in the
is not functioning and that service is required, however,
instrument cluster will come on when the
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
ignition switch is turned to the ON position. It
normally provided that the BRAKE warning light is not
on.
should go out with the engine running. If the
“ESC Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continuIf the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
ously with the engine running, a malfunction has been
as soon as possible to restore the benefit of Anti-Lock
detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after
Brakes.
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
The ABS warning light should be checked frequently to several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph
assure that it is operating properly. Turn the ignition key (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible
to the on position, but do not start the vehicle. The light to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
should come on. If the light does not come on, have the
NOTE:
system inspected by an authorized dealer.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Malfunction Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time
the ignition switch is turned ON.
4
168
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
that caused the ESC activation.
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
25. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
should be checked monthly, when cold and
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
low tire pressure telltale.
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
tires.)
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
169
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
4
170
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
26. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic system called OBD that
monitors emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. The light will illuminate when
the key is in the ON position before engine start. If the
bulb does not come on when turning the key from LOCK
to ON, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the light after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
damage to the engine control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is
flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and
power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants or wood or cardboard, etc. This could
result in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
27. Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If
Equipped
This light indicates that the transmission fluid
temperature is running hot. This may occur
with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this
light turns on, safely pull over and stop the
vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and
run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
171
WARNING!
Continued operation with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated could cause the
fluid to boil over, come in contact with hot engine or
exhaust components causing a fire that may result in
personal injury.
28. High Beam Indicator
This light indicates that the headlights are on high
beam. Pull the turn signal lever toward the steering wheel to switch the headlights to low beam.
29. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Display — If Equipped
This display shows the EVIC messages when the appropriate conditions exist. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” for further information.
4
172
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The EVIC consists of the following:
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) – IF EQUIPPED
• System Status
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the • Vehicle information warning message displays
instrument cluster.
• Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
• Compass heading display (N, S, E, W, NE, NW, SE,
SW)
• Outside temperature display (°F or °C)
• Trip computer functions
• Audio mode displays – 12 preset Radio Stations or CD
Title and Track number when playing
• Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) displays (if
equipped)
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The system allows the driver to select information by
pressing the following buttons on the instrument panel
switch bank located below the climate controls:
173
Press and release the RESET Button to accept a
selection. The RESET Button also resets various
Trip Functions.
Press and release the MENU button to advance RESET
the display to Trip Functions or Personal set- Button
tings or to return to the default System status Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
MENU display.
Displays
Button
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays
Press and release the STEP button to advance the following messages:
the display through the various Trip Functions
• Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime
or Personal Settings.
after one mile traveled)
STEP
Button
COMPASS
Button
• Left Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
Press and release the COMPASS button to • Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
display the compass heading and the out• Right Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single
side temperature.
chime)
• Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
4
174
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• RKE (Remote Keyless Entry) Battery Low (with a • Speed Too High (with a single chime)
single chime)
• Convertible Top Malfunction (with a single chime)
• Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle Not in Park
• Oil Change Required (with a single chime)
• Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle in Motion
Oil Change Required — If Equipped
• Left/Right Door Ajar (one or more, with a single Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
chime if speed is above 1 mph)
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will flash in the EVIC display for approximately five
• Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in
seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the
motion)
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
• Trunk Ajar (with a single chime)
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
• Headlights On
your personal driving style.
• Key In Ignition
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
• Convertible Top Not Secured (with a single chime)
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
• Convertible Top Complete (with a single chime)
• Secure Cargo Shield (with a single chime)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
175
release the Menu button. To reset the oil change indicator • Elapsed Time
system (after performing the scheduled maintenance)
• Display Units of Measure in
perform the following procedure:
Press and release the STEP button to advance the display
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not
through the Trip Functions.
start the engine).
The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times
tion:
within 10 seconds.
• Average Fuel Economy
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read,
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not RESET or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the history
information will be erased, and the averaging will conreset. If necessary repeat this procedure.
tinue from the last fuel average reading before the reset.
Trip Functions
Press and release the MENU button until one of the • Distance To Empty (DTE)
following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC:
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
• Average Fuel Economy
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
• Distance To Empty
4
176
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel • Display Units In:
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the RESET To make your selection, press and release the RESET
button.
button until “ENGLISH” or “METRIC” appears.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle To Reset The Display
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of Reset will only occur if a resettable function is currently
displayed. Press and hold the RESET button once to clear
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE display value.
the function currently displayed.
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change To reset all resettable functions, press and release the
to a text display of LOW FUEL. This display will con- RESET button a second time within three seconds of
tinue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a signifi- resetting the currently displayed function (Reset ALL will
cant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW display during this three-second window).
FUEL text and a new DTE value will display.
Compass Display
• Elapsed Time
The compass heading indicates the direcShows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset.
tion the vehicle is facing. Press and reElapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is
lease the compass button to display one
in the ON or START position.
COMPASS of eight compass heading and the outside
temperature.
Button
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to
be driven several minutes before the updated temperature is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
displayed temperature, therefore temperature readings
are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to calibrate the compass manually. When the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic and the
EVIC will flash the CAL indicator until the compass is
calibrated. You may calibrate the compass by completing
one or more 360° turns (in an area free from large metal
or metallic objects) until the CAL indicator in the EVIC
turns off. The compass will now function normally.
177
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic, inaccurate, or abnormal,
you may wish to calibrate the compass manually. However, prior to calibrating the compass, make sure the
proper Compass Variance value is selected (Refer to
“Compass Variance” for additional information). Then
continue to calibrate the compass as follows:
1. Start the engine. Leave the shift lever in PARK in order
to enter the EVIC Programming Menus.
2. Press and release the MENU Button until “Personal
Settings” displays in the EVIC.
3. Press and release the STEP button until “Calibrate
Compass Yes” displays in the EVIC.
4. Press and release the RESET Button and the CAL
indicator will quit flashing.
4
178
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5. Drive the vehicle slowly, completing one or more
circles (in an area free from large metal or metallic
objects) until the CAL indicator turns off. The compass
will now function normally.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
North and Geographic North. In some areas of the
country, the difference between magnetic and geographic
North is great enough to cause the compass to give false
readings. If this occurs, the compass variance must be set
using the following procedure:
Compass Variance Map
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of
the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Cell Phones, Lap- 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Leave the
tops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass shift lever in PARK.
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
2. Press and release the MENU button until “Personal
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
Settings” displays in the EVIC.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
179
3. Press and release the STEP button until “Compass Press and release the MENU button until “Personal
Variance” and the current Variance Value displays in the Settings” displays in the EVIC.
EVIC.
Press and release the STEP button to display the follow4. Press and release the RESET button to increment the ing programmable features:
Variance Value by one, (one button press per update),
Language
until the proper variance zone is selected according to the
When in this display you may select different languages
map.
for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions.
NOTE: The Variance Values will wrap around from 15 Pressing the RESET button while in this display selects
English, Spanish, French, German, Italian, or Dutch deback to 1. The Default Variance is Zone 8.
pending on availability. As you continue, the displayed
5. Press and release the STEP button to exit. Press the
information will be shown in the selected language.
STEP button if you wish to calibrate the compass manuAuto Unlock On Exit
ally (Refer to “Manual Compass Calibration”).
When ON is selected and the transaxle is in the PARK or
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
NEUTRAL position, all doors will unlock when the
Features)
driver’s door is opened. To make your selection, press
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall
and hold the RESET button until ON or OFF appears.
features when the automatic transaxle is in PARK.
4
180
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Remote Key Unlock
When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver’s
door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver
Door 1st Press is selected, you must press of the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. When All Doors 1st Press is selected, all of
the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection,
press and release the RESET button until “Driver Door
1st Press” or “All Doors 1st Press” appears.
Sound Horn with LOCK
When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when
the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. This feature
may be selected with or without the Flash Lights with
LOCK feature. To make your selection, press and release
the RESET button until ON or OFF appears.
Flash Lights with LOCK
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or
without the Sound Horn with LOCK feature selected. To
make your selection, press and release the RESET button
until ON or OFF appears.
Headlights Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press
and hold the RESET button until 0, 30, 60, or 90 appears.
Headlights With Wipers (Available with Auto
Headlights Only)
When ON is selected, and the headlight switch is in the
AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The
headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
181
off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your Illuminated Approach
selection, press and hold the RESET button until ON or When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
OFF appears.
unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter. To
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
make your selection, press and hold the RESET button
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
until “OFF,” “30 sec,” “60 sec,” or “90 sec” appears.
brightness, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The
Hill Start Assist (HSA) — If Equipped
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
When on is selected, the HSA system is active. Refer to
Key Off Power Delay
“Electronic Brake Control System” in “Starting And
When this feature is selected, the power window
Operating” for system function and operating informaswitches, radio, Uconnect™ Phone (if equipped), and
tion. To make your selection, press and release the RESET
power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
button until “On” or “Off” appears.
after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position.
Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature. To make Display Units In
your selection, press and hold the RESET button until The EVIC and odometer can be changed between English
and Metric units of measure. To make your selection,
OFF, 45 sec, 5 min, or 10 min appears.
press and release the RESET button until “ENGLISH” or
“METRIC” appears.
4
182
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK
MEDIA CENTER 230 (REQ) — AM/FM STEREO
RADIO AND 6–DISC CD/DVD CHANGER
(MP3/WMA AUX JACK)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
To set the analog clock, located at the top center of the
instrument panel, press and hold the button in until the
setting is correct. The clock will adjust slowly at first and
then quicker the longer the button is held.
Media Center 230 (REQ)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
183
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
position to operate the radio.
stations without stopping until you release it.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
SCAN Button
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
radio. Press the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
the next listenable station in AM, FM or Satellite (if
time to turn off the radio.
equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at each
Electronic Volume Control
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 the search, press the SCAN button a second time.
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
Voice Command Button Uconnect™ Phone — If
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
Equipped
volume and to the left decreases it.
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
When the audio system is turned ON, the sound will be (if equipped). Refer to “Voice Command in the Uconnect™
User Manual located on the DVD for further details.
set at the same volume level as last played.
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
SEEK Buttons
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With Uconnect
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch Phone” message will display on the radio screen.
4
184
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Phone Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
details.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not knob to save the time change.
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button
screen.
and selecting the “SET HOME CLOCK” entry. Once in
TIME Button
this display follow the above procedure, starting at
Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time
step 2.
and frequency display.
INFO Button
Clock Setting Procedure
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink. letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in AM, FM
or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
185
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency. sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
4
186
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
16-Digit Character Display
No program type
None
or undefined
Adult Hits
Adlt Hit
Classical
Classicl
Classic Rock
Cls Rock
College
College
Country
Country
Foreign Language
Language
Information
Inform
Program Type
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
16-Digit Character Display
Jazz
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R & B
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
187
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon • DVD Enter - When the disc is in DVD Menu mode,
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
highlighted selection. Use the remote control to scroll
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
up and down the menu (if equipped).
mode.
• DISC Play/Pause - You can toggle between
playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
pushing the SELECT button (if equipped).
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
• DVD Play Options - Selecting the DVD Play Options
SETUP Button
will display the following:
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
• Subtitle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch
subtitles to different subtitle languages that are
NOTE: Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll
available on the disc (if equipped).
through the entries. Push the AUDIO/SELECT button to
select an entry and make changes.
• Audio Stream – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will
switch to different audio languages (if supported on
the disc) (if equipped).
4
188
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Angle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change • Set Home Clock - Pressing the SELECT button allows
the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc (if
you to set the clock. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
equipped).
knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes.
NOTE:
Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to save
• The available selections for each of the above entries
changes.
varies depending upon the disc.
• Player Defaults - Selecting this item will allow the
• These selections can only be made while playing a
user to scroll through the following items and set
DVD.
defaults according to customer preference.
• VES™ Power - Allows you to turn VES™ ON and
Menu Language — If Equipped
OFF (if equipped).
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the
• VES™ Lock - Locks out rear VES™ remote controls (if default startup DVD menu language (effective only if
equipped).
language supported by disc). If you want to select a
language not listed, then scroll down and select ⬙other.⬙
• VES™ CH1/CH2 - Allows the user to change the
Enter the four-digit country code using the TUNE/
mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by
SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the
pressing the AUDIO/SELECT button (if equipped).
number and then push to select.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Audio Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting ⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
to select the number and then push to select.
Subtitle Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting ⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
to select the number and then push to select.
189
Audio DRC — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio
dynamic range. The default is set to ⬙High,⬙ and under
this setting, dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the
setting is ⬙Normal.⬙
Aspect Ratio — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide
screen, pan scan, and letter box.
AutoPlay — If Equipped
When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted, it will
bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the
movie. In some rare cases, the DVD player may not
auto-play the main title. In such cases, use the MENU
button on the remote control to select desired title to play.
Subtitles — If Equipped
NOTE: The user will have to set these defaults before
Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle
loading a disc. If changes are made to these settings after
Off or On.
4
190
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
a disc is loaded, changes will not be effective. Also, the both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM,
defaults are effective only if the disc supports the and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2
customer-preferred settings.
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
AM and FM Buttons
twice.
Press the buttons to select AM or FM mode.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
SET Button — To Set the Pushbutton Memory
button number will display.
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button. Buttons 1 - 6
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station commit to pushbutton memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
and press and release that button. If a button is not Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET butDISC Button
ton, the station will continue to play but will not be
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
stored into pushbutton memory.
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD and
MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO)
The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by
geographic region. These region codes must match in
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD
disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD
player, it will not play the disc. Customers may take their
vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code
of the player a maximum of five times.
CAUTION!
The radio may shut down during extremely hot
conditions. When this occurs, the radio will indicate
“Disc Hot” and shut off until a safe temperature is
reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the
optics of the DVD player and other radio internal
components.
191
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
LOAD Button — Loading Compact Disc(s)
Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the
corresponding number (1-6) where the CD is being
loaded. The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and
prompt when to INSERT DISC. After the radio displays
⬙INSERT DISC,⬙ insert the CD into the player.
Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc
is loading and “READING DISC” when the radio is
reading the disc.
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs only.
The use of other sized discs may damage the CD
player mechanism.
4
192
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Eject Button — Ejecting Compact Disc(s)
Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton
with the corresponding number (1-6) where the
CD was loaded and the disc will unload and
move to the entrance for easy removal. Radio
display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc is
being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
SCAN Button (CD MODE)
Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
TIME Button (CD MODE)
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF (CD MODE)
Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
CDs will be ejected from the radio.
begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW or
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF. another CD button is pressed. The RW (Rewind) button
works in a similar manner.
SEEK Button (CD MODE)
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the AM or FM Button (CD MODE)
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode.
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in
CD and MP3/MWA modes.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
193
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files
The radio can play MP3/WMA files; however, acceptable
• Maximum number of directory levels: 8
MP3/WMA file recording media and formats are limited.
When writing MP3/WMA files, pay attention to the • Maximum number of files: 255
following restrictions.
• Maximum number of folders: 100
Supported Media (Disc Types)
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
The MP3/WMA file recording media supported by the
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threeradio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3,WMA, DVD Video,
character extension)
DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3/
WMA files). Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep
disc open after writing⬙ are most likely multisession
discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3/
WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times.
4
194
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If a disc contains multi-formats, such as CD audio and
MP3/WMA tracks, the radio will only play the MP3/
WMA tracks on that disc.
MPEG
Specification
Supported MP3/WMA File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3/WMA
extension as MP3/WMA files. Non-MP3/WMA files
named with the *.MP3/WMA extension may cause playback problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file
as an invalid MP3/WMA and will not play the file.
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling
Bit Rate (kbps)
Frequency (kHz)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
48, 44.1, 32
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
160, 128, 144,
24, 22.05, 16
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
WMA
Sampling
When using the MP3/WMA encoder to compress audio
Bit Rate (kbps)
Specification Frequency (kHz)
data to an MP3/WMA file, the bit rate and sampling
48, 64, 96, 128,
frequencies in the following table are supported. In
WMA
44.1 and 48
160, 192 VBR
addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The
majority of MP3/WMA files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.
are supported for ID3 version 1 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
195
Playback of MP3/WMA Files
When a medium containing MP3/WMA data is loaded,
the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3/WMA files.
LIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
Loading times for playback of MP3/WMA files may be
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
affected by the following:
playable files).
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
CD-R media
INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
to load than non-multisession discs
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will Name, and Folder Name (if available).
increase with more files and folders
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended time⬙ priority mode.
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
more and radio will display song titles for each file.
before writing to the disc.
4
196
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
No function.
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3/WMA player, cassette player, or microphone and
utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source
and play through the vehicle speakers.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the TIME button to change the display from
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxilelapsed playing time to time of day. The time of day will
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
display for five seconds.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
No function.
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
down.
No function.
SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions — Voice Command System
(If Equipped)
For the radio, Refer to “Voice Command” in the
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
details.
197
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES)™ (If Equipped)
Refer to “Video Entertainment System (VES)™” in the
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
details.
Refer to the Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD Dolby威
for further details.
Manufactured under license from Dolby威 Laboratories.
⬙Dolby威⬙ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone (If
Dolby威 Laboratories.
Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User Macrovision
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellecOperating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia
tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
(Satellite Radio) (If Equipped)
technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
Refer to “Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio)” in the
intended for home and other limited viewing uses only,
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
details.
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
4
198
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
DTS™
Operating Instructions — Voice Command
⬙DTS™⬙ and ⬙DTS™ 2.0⬙ are trademarks of Digital The- System — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ User
ater Systems, Inc.
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
MEDIA CENTER 730N/430 (RER/REN/RBZ) —
AM/FM STEREO RADIO AND CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — Operating Instructions — Uconnect™ Phone — If
Equipped
IF EQUIPPED
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side Manual located on the DVD for further details.
of the unit’s faceplate.
Clock Setting Procedure — RBZ Radio
The REN, RER and RBZ radios contain a CD/DVD
player, USB port, and a 30-gigabyte hard drive (HDD). To Manually Set the Clock
Sirius Satellite Radio is optional. The 6.5 in (16.5 cm) 1. Turn on the radio.
touch screen allows for easy menu selection.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed, the clock
The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System setting menu will appear on the screen.
(GPS)-based Navigation system.
Refer to your Uconnect™ Multimedia REN, RER or RBZ
user’s manual for detailed operating instructions.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the
word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is displayed. To move the hour backward, touch the screen
where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing downward is displayed.
199
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the
screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are dis4. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where played to change the current setting.
the word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is
Show Time if Radio is Off
displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the
When selected, this feature will display the time of day
screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing
on the touch screen when the radio is turned off. Proceed
downward is displayed.
as follows to change the current setting:
5. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where
1. Turn on the radio.
the word “Save” is displayed.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
Changing Daylight Savings Time
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
When selected, this feature will display the time of day in
daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the 3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
current setting:
the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.”
Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is
1. Turn on the radio.
Off” are displayed to change the current setting.
4
200
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is the
worldwide standard for time. This makes the system’s
1. Turn on the radio.
clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The daylight savings information is set.
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
To Manually Set the Clock — RER/REN
3. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are
1. Turn on the radio.
displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
the screen.
Changing the Time Zone
4. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your 3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the
selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is
4. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the
displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is dis5. Touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed. played. To move the hour backward, touch the screen
where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing downClock Setting Procedure — RER/REN Radio
ward is displayed.
Uconnect威 gps — RER Only
5. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where
The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to
the word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is
the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite. The
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
201
displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the Show Time if Radio is Off
screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing When selected, this feature will display the time of day
on the touch screen when the radio is turned off. Proceed
downward is displayed.
as follows to change the current setting:
6. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where
1. Turn on the radio.
the word “Save” is displayed.
Changing Daylight Savings Time
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
When selected, this feature will display the time of day in
3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the
daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
current setting:
4. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
1. Turn on the radio.
the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.”
2. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
Off” are displayed to change the current setting.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in Changing the Time Zone
the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the
1. Turn on the radio.
screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are dis2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
played to change the current setting.
4
202
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
4. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are
displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on
the screen.
5. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your
selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you
want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is
displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
6. Touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed.
MEDIA CENTER 130 (RES) — AM/FM STEREO
RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK)
Media Center 130 (RES)
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
side of the radio faceplate.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
203
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
TIME Button
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second and radio frequency.
time to turn off the radio.
Clock Setting Procedure
Electronic Volume Control
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning 2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the SCROLL control knob.
volume, and to the left decreases it.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
set at the same volume level as last played.
will begin to blink.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping, until you release it.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
4
204
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency. sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
AM/FM Button
mid-range tones.
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
this station and press and release that button. If a button
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
205
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
4
206
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
207
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within RW/FF
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse)
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
button works in a similar manner.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
AM/FM Button
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SEEK Button
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
change of pace.
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ranCD and MP3 modes.
domly selected track.
TIME Button
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Press this button to change the display from a large CD Play.
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
4
208
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Notes on Playing MP3 Files
• Maximum number of files: 255
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
file recording media and formats are limited. When
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restricof files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
tions.
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
Supported Media (Disc Types)
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 • Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threeWhen reading discs recorded using formats other than
character extension)
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threefiles properly and may be unable to play the file norcharacter extension)
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rate.
MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
209
Sampling
Bit Rate (kbps)
Frequency (kHz)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
48, 44.1, 32
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
24, 22.05, 16
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
4
210
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
to load than non-multisession discs
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
increase with more files and folders
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a OFF).
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MEDIA CENTER 130 (RES/RSC) — AM/FM
STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX
JACK) AND SIRIUS RADIO
211
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
ACC position to operate the radio.
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
side of the radio faceplate.
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
Media Center 130 (RES/RSC)
4
212
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect” message will display on the radio screen.
Phone Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
details.
Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ User
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Voice Command Button Uconnect™ Phone — If
Uconnect” message will display on the radio screen.
Equipped
TIME Button
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
(if equipped). Refer to “Voice Command” in the
and radio frequency.
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
details.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
213
starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
procedure, starting at Step 2.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
INFO Button
SCROLL control knob.
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/ letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
will begin to blink.
RW/FF
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/ Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
knob to save time change.
AM or FM frequencies.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
TUNE Control
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,
Clock Setting Procedure
4
214
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
MUSIC TYPE Button
mid-range tones.
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
treble tones.
Music Type information.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
No program type
or undefined
Adult Hits
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Country
Foreign Language
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
16-Digit Character
Display
None
Adlt Hit
Classicl
Cls Rock
College
Country
Language
Inform
Jazz
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Program Type
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
16-Digit Character
Display
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
215
4
216
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
to save time change.
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
AM/FM Button
mode.
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
Memory
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
SETUP Button
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
the following items:
window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this
station and press and release that button. If a button is
• Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/
you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the
RND button, the station will continue to play but will not
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the
be stored into pushbutton memory.
hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
217
Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC
position to operate the radio.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
button number will display.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Buttons 1 - 6
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
stations).
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
DISC/AUX Button
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
4
218
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON/RUN and the EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode
and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display
will show the track number, and index time in minutes
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
CAUTION!
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
219
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop RanTIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD dom Play.
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
RW/FF
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will file recording media and formats are limited. When
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restricanother CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button tions.
works in a similar manner.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
AM/FM Button
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file norPress the right SEEK button to move to the next ranmally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
domly selected track.
4
220
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
Maximum number of folder levels: 8
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
Maximum number of files: 255
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
longer disc loading times.
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name and will assign Supported MP3 File Formats
a number instead. With a maximum number of files, The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extenexceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
display.)
not play the file.
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threean MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
character extension)
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
•
•
•
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
221
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files Playback of MP3 Files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
VBR bit rates.
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
MPEG
Sampling
Bit Rate (kbps)
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Specification Frequency (kHz)
320, 256, 224,
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
MPEG-1 Audio
192, 160, 128,
by the following:
48, 44.1, 32
Layer 3
112, 96, 80, 64,
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
56, 48, 40, 32
CD-R media
160, 128, 144,
MPEG-2 Audio
112, 96, 80, 64,
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
24, 22.05, 16
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
Layer 3
to load than non-multisession discs
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title • Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
supported.
before writing to the disc.
4
222
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxilINFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
time⬙ priority mode.
down.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
223
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when the
ignition is OFF).
Uconnect™ Multimedia (SATELLITE RADIO) — IF
EQUIPPED (REN/REQ/RER/RBZ/RES RADIOS
ONLY)
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone (If
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Equipped)
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chilManual located on the DVD for further details.
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
(Satellite Radio) (If Equipped)
limited coverage in Alaska.
Refer to “Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio)” in the
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
details.
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone (If
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
Equipped)
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welRefer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
come kit that contains general information, including
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
4
224
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at www- display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
ESN/SID Access With REN/RER/RBZ Radios
While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio
Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when faceplate.
calling:
Next, touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen.
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display.
Number (ESN/SID).
Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
mode.
ESN/SID Access With REQ/RES Radios
Satellite Antenna
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posiTo ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
225
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly (Satellite) Mode
on or above the antenna.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
SEEK Buttons
following reasons:
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
structure or under a physical obstacle.
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
form of short audio mutes.
without stopping until you release it.
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
SCAN Button
cause intermittent reception.
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before concause signal blockage.
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.
4
226
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INFO Button
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display information between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if available). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
to normal display).
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
RW/FF
type.
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
direction of the arrows.
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
227
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
following items:
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
• Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
twice.
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
Sirius subscription.
button number will display.
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to Buttons 1 - 6
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button. These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone (If
and press and release that button. If a button is not
Equipped)
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET butRefer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
4
228
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. The left and right controls
are rocker-type switches with a pushbutton in the center
of each switch. Reach behind the steering wheel to access
the switches.
Remote Sound System Controls
(Back View Of Steering Wheel)
Right-Hand Switch Functions
• Press the top of the switch to increase the volume.
• Press the bottom of the switch to decrease the volume.
• Press the button in the center of the switch to change
modes (i.e., AM, FM, etc.).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
229
• Press the button located in the center of the switch to
change to the next preset that you have programmed.
• Press the top of the switch to SEEK the next listenable
station up from the current setting.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
Left-Hand Switch Functions for Radio Operation
• Press the bottom of the switch to SEEK the next To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
listenable station down from the current setting.
precautions:
• Press the button in the center of the switch to tune to 1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface.
the next preset that you have programmed.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
Left-Hand Switch Functions for Media (i.e., CD)
Operation
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch• Press the top of the switch once to listen to the next track. ing the disc.
• Press the bottom of the switch once either to listen to 4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
the beginning of the current track or to listen to the or anti-static sprays.
beginning of the previous track if it is within one
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
second after the current track begins to play.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
• Press the switch up or down twice to listen to the
second track, three times to listen to the third track, 7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
and so forth.
4
230
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu- Manual Heating and Air Conditioning
lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
Manual Temperature Control
turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of
outer rotary dials and inner push knobs.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Air Conditioning and Heating System is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Blower Control
Rotate this control to regulate the
amount of air forced through the ventilation system in any mode. The
blower speed increases as you move
the control to the right from the “O”
(OFF) position. There are four blower
speeds.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the
climate controls will not function during Remote Start
operation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off)
position.
231
Temperature Control
Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. Rotating the dial left
into the blue area of the scale indicates
cooler temperatures while rotating
right into the red area indicates
warmer temperatures.
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
4
232
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Mode Control (Air Direction)
Rotate this control to choose from several patterns of air distribution. You
can select either a primary mode as
identified by the symbols on the control, or a blend of two of these modes.
The closer the setting is to a particular
symbol, the more air distribution you
receive from that mode.
NOTE: For all settings except full cold or full hot, there
is a difference in temperature between the upper and
lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets.
This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but
cool conditions.
Floor
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount flowing through the defrost and side
window demist outlets.
Panel
Mix
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be
aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
passengers for maximum airflow to the rear.
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maximum blower and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting.
233
will cause the LED in the control button to illuminate.
After ten minutes, the system will return to normal mode
function and the LED will turn off.
NOTE:
• Continuous use of the recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
Mix, Defrost, or a blend of these modes, even if the Air
Conditioning (A/C) button is not pressed. This dehu• The use of the recirculation mode in cold or damp
midifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve
weather will cause windows to fog on the inside,
fuel economy, use these modes only when necessary.
because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select
the Outside Air position for maximum defogging.
Recirculation Control
Pressing the Recirculation Control button will
• The A/C will engage automatically to prevent fogging
temporarily put the system in recirculation
when the recirculation button is pressed and the mode
mode (10 minutes). This can be used when
control is set to panel or Bi-Level.
outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust,
or high humidity are present. Activating recirculation
4
234
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Recirculated air is not allowed in Floor, Mix or Defrost
modes. If the Recirculation button is depressed while
in any of these modes, the LED indicator will flash
several times then go out. Recirculation will be disabled automatically is these modes are selected.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage
until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds.
• MAX A/C
For maximum cooling use the A/C and recirculation
buttons at the same time.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturb• ECONOMY MODE
ing the mode control selection.
If economy mode is desired, press the A/C button to turn
• When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK OFF the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then,
position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
move the temperature control to the desired temperature.
Air Conditioning Control
Press this button to engage the Air
Conditioning. A light will illuminate
when the Air Conditioning System is
engaged. Rotating the dial left into the
blue area of the scale indicates cooler
temperatures while rotating right into
the red area indicates warmer temperatures.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped
235
NOTE: The AUTO position performs best for front seat
occupants only.
Automatic Temperature Control
2. Dial in the temperature you would
like the system to maintain by rotating
the Temperature Control knob. Once
the comfort level is selected, the system will maintain that level automatically using the heating system. Should
the desired comfort level require air
conditioning, the system will automatically make the
adjustment.
Automatic Operation
The Automatic Temperature Control system automatically maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at
the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger.
You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply
allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting
the “O” (OFF) position on the blower control stops the
system completely and closes the outside air intake.
Operation of the system is quite simple.
72°F (22°C) is the recommended setting for maximum
1. Turn the Mode Control knob (on the right) and the comfort for the average person; however, this may vary.
Blower Control knob (on the left) to AUTO.
4
236
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
Blower Control
• The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime
For full automatic operation or for
without affecting automatic operation.
automatic blower operation turn the
knob to AUTO position. In manual
• Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in
mode there are seven blower speeds
AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button
that can be individual selected. In off
to flash three times and then turn off. This indicates
position the blower will shut off.
that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the
air conditioning is not necessary.
Manual Operation
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features, which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic,
Mode Preferred Automatic, or Blower and Mode Preferred Automatic. This means the operator can override
the blower, the mode, or both. There is a manual blower
range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired.
The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by
• While operating in AUTO, the system will not auto- rotating the Blower Control knob (on the left).
matically sense the presence of fog, mist or ice on the
windshield. The defrost mode must be manually se- NOTE: Please read the Automatic Temperature Control
Operation Chart that follows for details.
lected to clear the windshield and side glass.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser located
in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or
insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind
the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front
fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser,
reducing air conditioning performance.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
237
4
238
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to • Floor
change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
knob (on the right) to one of the following positions.
small amount flowing through the defrost and side
window demist outlets.
• Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument • Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to
aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
passengers for maximum airflow to the rear.
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
• Bi-Level
• Defrost
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxiNOTE: For all settings except full cold or full hot, there mum blower and temperature settings for best windis a difference in temperature between the upper and shield and side window defrosting.
lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets.
This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but
cool conditions.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
239
NOTE:
• Air Conditioner Control
Press this button to turn on the air • When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
conditioning during manual operation
position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
only. When the air conditioning is
turned on, cool dehumidified air will • In cold weather, use of the Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
flow through the outlets selected with
mode is not allowed in the floor, defrost, or Mix mode
the Mode control dial. Press this butin order to improve window clearing. Recirculation
ton a second time to turn OFF the air
will be disabled automatically if these modes are
conditioning. An LED in the button illuminates when
selected.
manual compressor operation is selected.
• Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows
• Recirculation Control
to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to fog,
The system will automatically control recircupress the Recirculation button to return to outside air.
lation. However, pressing the Recirculation
Some temp/humidity conditions will cause captured
Control button will temporarily put the system
interior air to condense on windows and hamper
in recirculation mode (ten minutes). This can
visibility. For this reason, the system will not allow
be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors,
Recirculation to be selected while in floor, defrost, or
dust, or high humidity are present. Activating recirculaMix mode. Attempting to use the recirculation while in
tion will cause the LED in the control button to illumithese modes will cause the LED in the control button
nate. After ten minutes, the system will return to normal
to blink and then turn off.
AUTO mode function and the LED will turn off.
4
240
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Most of the time, when in Automatic Operation, you
can temporarily put the system into Recirculation
Mode by pressing the Recirculation button. However,
under certain conditions, while in Automatic Mode,
the system is blowing air out the defrost vents. When
these conditions are present, and the Recirculation
button is pressed, the indicator will flash and then turn
off. This tells you that you are unable to go into
Recirculation Mode at this time. If you would like the
system to go into Recirculation Mode, you must first
move the Mode knob to Panel, Mix and then press the
Recirculation button. This feature reduces the possibility of window fogging.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehicles
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. A solution of 50% ethylene
glycol antifreeze coolant and 50% water is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
Use of the air Recirculation Mode during winter months is
not recommended because it may cause window fogging.
Vacation Storage
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
Operating Tips
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
suggested control settings for various weather condi- fresh air and high blower settings. This will ensure
tions.
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The Mix
mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and
provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes a problem, increase blower speed. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid
weather.
NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for
long periods as fogging may occur.
Side Window Demisters
A side window demister outlet is located at each end of
the instrument panel. These non-adjustable outlets direct
air toward the side windows when the system is in the
FLOOR, MIX, or DEFROST mode. The air is directed at
the area of the windows through which you view the
outside mirrors.
241
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter — If Equipped
The A/C Filter prevents most dust and pollen from
entering the cabin. The filter acts on air coming from
outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the passenger compartment. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures”
in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for A/C Air Filter service
information or see your authorized dealer for service.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedules” for filter service
intervals.
4
242
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
▫ Brake/Transmission Interlock System . . . . . . 252
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
▫ Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
▫ Extreme Cold Weather (Below ⫺20°F Or
⫺29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
䡵 Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 250
䡵 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
▫ Four-Speed/Six-Speed Automatic
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
䡵 AutoStick威 — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
5
244
STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) – If Equipped . . . . . . 271
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . 273
䡵 Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 䡵 Tire Safety Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . 280
䡵 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . 281
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 282
䡵 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 䡵 Tires — General Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
䡵 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
䡵 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . 269
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . 269
▫ Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . 270
▫ Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
STARTING AND OPERATING
245
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
▫ 3.5L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . 306
䡵 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
䡵 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 294
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
䡵 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . 295
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 䡵 Flexible Fuel (2.7L Only) — If Equipped . . . . . 310
▫ Premium System – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 300
▫ E85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
䡵 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
▫ 2.4L And 2.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
5
246
STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel
Vehicles (E85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . 312
▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
▫ Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
䡵 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
䡵 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
▫ Loose Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
䡵 Vehicle Loading
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
䡵 Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . 328
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . 316
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
(Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The
Ground) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . 317
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the keys in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
247
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON position,
and you must press the brake pedal before shifting out of
PARK.
Normal Starting
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
For vehicles not equipped with Tip Start (Four-Speed
Transmission), turn the ignition switch to the START
position and release it when the engine starts. If the
engine fails to start within 10 seconds, turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Automatic Transmission
For vehicles equipped with Tip Start (Six-Speed TransThe shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL
mission), turn the ignition switch to the START position
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
and release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter
before shifting to any driving gear.
5
248
STARTING AND OPERATING
motor will continue to run, and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running. If the engine fails
to start, the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal
Starting” procedure.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned
fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once
the engine has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to
obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery
in another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further
information.
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
Without Tip Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures, it may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all
Extreme Cold Weather (Below ⫺20°F or ⫺29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
249
the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the With Tip Start
engine. This should clear any excess fuel in case the If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” proceengine is flooded.
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, push
CAUTION!
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this
15 seconds before trying again.
occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
If the engine is flooded, it may start to run, but not have
repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
enough power to continue running when the key is
released. If this occurs, continue cranking up to 15 secCAUTION!
onds with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the
floor.
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal
After Starting
held to the floor, repeat the “Normal Starting” or “ExThe idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine
treme Cold Weather” procedures.
warms up.
5
250
STARTING AND OPERATING
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
CAUTION!
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
Damage to the transmission may occur if the followgrounded, three-wire extension cord.
ing precautions are not observed:
The engine block heater cord is bundled under the hood • Shift the shift lever into PARK only after the
between the headlight assembly and the Totally Intevehicle has come to a complete stop.
grated Power Module (Fuse Box) on the driver’s side of • Shift the shift lever into or out of REVERSE only
the vehicle.
after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and
the engine is at idle speed.
WARNING!
• Do not shift the shift lever from REVERSE, PARK,
or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the
Remember to disconnect the cord before driving.
engine is above idle speed.
Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause
• Before shifting the shift lever into any gear, make
electrocution.
sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
STARTING AND OPERATING
251
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake
pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward
or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle
and hit someone or something. Only shift into
gear when the engine is idling normally and when
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
(Continued)
Shift Lever
NOTE: You MUST press and hold the brake pedal down
while shifting the shift lever out of PARK.
5
252
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, you should
always shift the vehicle into PARK, remove the
key from the ignition, and apply the parking
brake. Once the key is removed from the ignition,
the shift lever is locked in the PARK position,
securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
Furthermore, you should never leave children unattended inside a vehicle.
can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition
is in the LOCK position and once removed the shift lever
is locked in PARK.
Brake/Transmission Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in the
PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK
position. To move the shift lever out of the PARK
position, the ignition switch must be turned to any other
switch position (ACC, ON, or START) (engine running or
not) and the brake pedal must be pressed.
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the transmission will
not shift out of PARK. Battery power is required to
Key Ignition Park Interlock
release the Brake/Transmission Interlock system. HowThis vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter- ever, an override system allows you to shift out of PARK
lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK in case of loss of power. To activate the override system:
prior to rotating the key to the LOCK position. The key
• Firmly apply the parking brake.
STARTING AND OPERATING
253
• Insert the ignition key into the ignition switch and Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock System
This system prevents the key from being removed unless
rotate it to the ON position.
the shift lever is in PARK. It also prevents shifting out of
• Remove the cup holder liner.
PARK unless the ignition switch is in the ON position,
• Insert a key, screwdriver, or finger into the hole at the and the brake pedal is applied.
front of the cup holder and push and hold the manual
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
override release lever forward.
key in the ignition switch lock cylinder to warn you that
• While holding the release lever forward, move the this safety feature is inoperable. The engine can be started
shift lever from PARK to NEUTRAL.
and stopped, but the key cannot be removed until you
obtain service.
• Release the manual override.
Four-Speed/Six-Speed Automatic Transmission
NOTE: If this occurs, even if the override is successful,
The electronically controlled transmission provides a
it is recommended that you visit a dealer at your earliest
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
possible convenience. Your dealer has diagnostic equipself-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
ment to determine if the problem could recur.
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles/kilometers.
5
254
STARTING AND OPERATING
Gear Ranges
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while vehicle is in motion.
Apply parking brake when leaving vehicle in this range.
When parking on a flat surface, place the shift lever into
the PARK position first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As
an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an
uphill grade.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the
ignition key in the ignition switch. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
CAUTION!
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
or NEUTRAL positions into another gear range as
this can damage the drivetrain.
STARTING AND OPERATING
255
REVERSE
DRIVE – Six-Speed Transmission
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Use only This range should be used for most city and highway
after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts, downshifts,
and best fuel economy. However, use the AutoStick威
NEUTRAL
mode and select the appropriate gear when frequent
This range is used when vehicle is standing for protransmission shifting occurs in the DRIVE range. For
longed periods with engine running. Engine may be
example: When operating the vehicle under heavy loadstarted in this range. Set the parking brake if you must
ing conditions, (i.e., in hilly terrain, traveling into strong
leave the vehicle.
headwinds, or while towing heavy trailers). Under these
conditions, reducing shifting by selecting the appropriate
WARNING!
gear in AutoStick威 will improve the performance and
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
ignition switch to coast down a hill. These are unsafe and heat build-up.
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
DRIVE – Four-Speed Transmission
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
This range should be used for most city and highway
vehicle and have an accident.
driving, it provides the smoothest upshifts, downshifts,
and best fuel economy. However, select the ⬙3⬙ range
when frequent transmission shifting occurs while using
the DRIVE range, such as when operating the vehicle
5
256
STARTING AND OPERATING
under heavy loading conditions, (i.e., in hilly terrain,
traveling into strong headwinds, or while towing heavy
trailers). Under these conditions, using the ⬙3⬙ range will
improve performance and extend transmission life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat build-up.
gear operation at higher speeds. The ⬙3⬙ range should
also be used when descending steep grades to prevent
brake system distress
NOTE: Using the ⬙3⬙ range while operating the vehicle
under heavy operating conditions will improve perforNOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with AutoStick威, you mance and extend transmission life by reducing excescan reduce the frequency of transmission shifting during sive shifting and heat build-up.
heavy loading, hilly terrain, strong headwinds, or while
LOW — Four-Speed Transmission
towing. Under these conditions, selecting the appropriate
This range should be used for engine braking when
gear in AutoStick威 will improve the performance and
descending very steep grades. In this range, upshifts will
extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
occur only to prevent engine overspeed while downshifts
and heat build-up.
occur earlier than other gear range selections.
DRIVE 3 — Four-Speed Transmission
This range eliminates shifts into fourth gear. The transmission will operate normally in first and second gear.
Shifts into third gear may be delayed to provide second
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
If the transmission operating temperature exceeds
acceptable limits, the vehicle computer will override
DRIVE (OVERDRIVE) and [5] for six–speed
AutoStick威 transmission and [3] for four–speed
transmission, range by changing shift points. This is
done to prevent transmission damage due to overheating.
Reset Mode - Electronic Transmission
The transmission is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could cause
damage, the transmission automatically shifts into second gear (third gear for six–speed). The transmission
remains in second gear (third gear for six–speed) despite
257
the forward gear selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. The Reset feature allows
the vehicle to be driven to a dealer for service without
damaging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the shift lever into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
4. Restart the engine.
5. Shift the shift lever into the desired gear range and
resume driving.
5
258
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, it is
recommended that you visit a dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. Your dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur.
Operation
By placing the shift lever one shift-level below the DRIVE
position, it can be moved from side to side. This allows
the driver to select a higher or lower range of gears.
Moving the shift lever to the left (-) triggers a downshift
If the transmission cannot be reset, dealer service is
and to the right (+) an upshift. The gear position will
required.
display in the instrument cluster on the transmission
range indicator.
AUTOSTICK姞 — IF EQUIPPED
AutoStick威 is a driver-interactive transmission that offers NOTE: In AutoStick威 mode, the transmission will only
six manual ratio changes to provide you with more shift up or down when the driver moves the shift lever to
control of the vehicle. AutoStick威 allows you to maximize the right (+) or left (-).
engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and
downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance. AutoStick威 is deactivated when the shift lever is moved
This system can also provide you with more control from the AutoStick (+/-) position into the DRIVE
during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, position.
mountain driving, trailer towing, and many other situations.
STARTING AND OPERATING
General Information
259
• If a low range is selected and the engine accelerates to
the rev limit, the transmission will automatically select
the next higher ratio.
• You can start out, from a stop, in any gear except sixth.
The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
• If a downshift would cause the engine to over-speed,
of a vehicle speed.
that shift will not occur until it is safe for the engine.
• If a ratio other than first is selected, and the vehicle is
Mostly the transmission will stay in the manually
brought to a stop, the transmission control logic will
selected ratio, however:
automatically select the first gear ratio.
− If the system detects powertrain overheating, the
• Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy
transmission will revert to the automatic shift mode
conditions.
and remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off.
• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick威 is en− If the system detects a problem, it will disable the
gaged.
AutoStick威 mode and the transmission will return to
• The transmission will automatically shift up when
the automatic mode until the problem is corrected.
maximum engine speed is reached while AutoStick威 is
engaged.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick威 is engaged.
5
260
STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when
there is a difference in the surface traction under the front
(driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have an accident. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
4. Keep the tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain enough distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden
stop.
STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
261
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
and Warning before doing so.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
(Continued)
5
262
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil,
transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination
(i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance)
after driving through standing water. Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears
contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you
stranded.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
STARTING AND OPERATING
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
263
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
does not in any way damage the steering system.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
5
264
STARTING AND OPERATING
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave the
transmission in PARK.
STARTING AND OPERATING
The parking brake lever is located in the center console.
To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up
slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever
completely.
265
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument
cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
Parking Brake
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
5
266
STARTING AND OPERATING
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured.
• Do not leave the key in the ignition. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and an accident.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to
roll and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
STARTING AND OPERATING
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
braking conditions. The system operates with a separate
computer to modulate the hydraulic pressure to prevent
wheel lock-up and avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.
WARNING!
• Pumping of the anti-lock brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to an accident.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need
to slow down or stop.
(Continued)
267
WARNING! (Continued)
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and
tires or the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
• The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
5
268
STARTING AND OPERATING
The “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System. The light will
come on when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position and may stay on for as long as
four seconds.
(ABS) and Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
Systems are not functioning. Immediate repair to the ABS
system is required. See your authorized dealer.
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you
may hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related
motor noises. These noises are the system performing its
self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS system is working
properly. This self check occurs each time the vehicle is
started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
Warning Light” is not on.
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can inIf the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore
debris, or panic stops.
the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake
Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition You also may experience the following when the brake
switch is turned to the ON position, have the bulb system goes into anti-lock:
repaired as soon as possible.
• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
If both the “Brake Warning Light” and the “Anti-Lock
short time after the stop),
Brake Warning Light” remain on, the Anti-Lock Brake
STARTING AND OPERATING
• the clicking sound of solenoid valves,
• brake pedal pulsations,
269
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type, and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
• and a slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
end of the stop.
Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional adThese are all normal characteristics of ABS.
vanced electronic brake control system that includes
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Traction Control System
WARNING!
(TCS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist (HSA),
The Anti-Lock Brake System contains sophisticated and Electronic Stability Control (ESC). All systems work
electronic equipment that may be susceptible to together to enhance vehicle stability and control in variinterference caused by improperly installed or high ous driving conditions and are commonly referred to as
output radio transmitting equipment. This interfer- ESC.
ence can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking
capability. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock-up and
5
270
STARTING AND OPERATING
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking. Brake Assist System (BAS)
Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting and The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
Operating” for further information.
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensTraction Control System (TCS)
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
stability. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braka limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin
ing pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
deactivated.
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in
the “Partial Off” mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)” in this section of this manual.
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
• The BAS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
271
Hill Start Assist (HSA) – If Equipped
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver in
launching a vehicle on an incline. HSA will maintain the
level of brake pressure the driver inputs for a short
duration once the driver takes his foot off of the brake
pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle during this
short duration, the system will release brake pressure
and the vehicle will roll down the incline. The system will
release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of
throttle applied.
During operation, HSA will activate the brake control
system and a clicking noise may occur. If your foot is on
the brake pedal during operation you may feel a slight
pedal movement. The clicking and pedal movement is
normal and both will stop when HSA becomes inactive.
5
272
STARTING AND OPERATING
The system will only work if the intended direction of the
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to vehicle and vehicle gear match. For example, if the
intended direction is forward up a hill and the vehicle is
activate:
in DRIVE and the activation criteria are met, HSA will
• Vehicle must be stopped
activate.
• Vehicle must be on a 7% or greater incline
The system will work in REVERSE and all forward gears,
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e., and will not activate if the vehicle is placed in
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle back- NEUTRAL.
ing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
HSA Off
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills (i.e., less than
7%), with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer
where the system will not activate and slight rolling
may occur, which could cause a collision with another vehicle or object. Always remember the driver
is responsible for braking the vehicle.
Non-EVIC Equipped Vehicles
If you wish to turn off the HSA system, follow this
procedure:
NOTE: You must complete Steps 1 through 8 within
90 seconds.
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
straight forward).
STARTING AND OPERATING
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. Apply the parking brake.
273
10. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature
to it’s previous setting.
EVIC Equipped Vehicles
HSA is a Customer Programmable Feature on a EVIC
5. Release the clutch pedal.
equipped vehicle. If you wish to turn off the HSA feature,
refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
6. Rotate the steering wheel one-half turn to the left.
Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding
7. Press the “ESC Off” switch four times within 20 sec- Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
onds. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” should turn on and
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
turn off two times.
This system enhances directional control and stability of
8. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC coradditional half-turn to the right.
rects for over/under steering of the vehicle by applying
9. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counterback to the ON position. If the sequence was completed acting the over/under steer condition. Engine power
properly, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will blink several may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the
desired path. ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to detertimes to confirm HSA is disabled.
mine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual
4. Start the engine.
5
274
STARTING AND OPERATING
path does not match the intended path, ESC applies the
brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
the oversteer or understeer condition
• Over-steer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Under-steer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESC Off Indicator Light
The “ESC Off Indicator Light” (located in the
instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes
active. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Off Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure
to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
WARNING!
• The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions.
• ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent
accidents.
• The capabilities of an ESC-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
STARTING AND OPERATING
ESC Malfunction Indicator Light
The “ESC Malfunction Indicator Light” in the
instrument cluster will come on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position. It
should go out with the engine running. If the
“ESC Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been
detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible
to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
275
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
ESC Operating Modes
All ESC equipped vehicles can choose the following ESC
operating modes:
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started the ESC system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for almost all driving situations. ESC should only be turned to “Partial Off” for
specific reasons as noted below.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Malfunction Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time Partial ESC Mode
the ignition switch is turned ON.
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the “ESC
Off” switch (located in the lower switch bank below the
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
heater/air conditioning controls). When in “Partial Off”
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
mode, the TCS portion of ESC, except for the limited slip
5
276
STARTING AND OPERATING
feature described in the TCS section, has been disabled
and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated. All
other stability features of ESC function normally, with the
exception of engine power reduction. This mode is
intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand,
or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESC
would normally allow is required to gain traction.
To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the “ESC Off”
switch. This will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of
operation.
WARNING!
In the Partial ESC mode, the engine torque reduction
and stability features are desensitized. Therefore, the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is unavailable.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by pressing the “ESC Off” switch. Once the situation requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial Off”
mode is overcome, turn ESC on again by momentarily
pressing the “ESC Off” switch. This may be done while
the vehicle is in motion.
STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
277
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
5
278
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T” • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designastandards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
—⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
STARTING AND OPERATING
279
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load = Light load tire
C, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
5
280
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
STARTING AND OPERATING
281
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is a structural member of the body located
between the front and rear door (of a four-door vehicle) running
from the sill to the roof.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
KPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The max inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire size and the
recommended inflation pressure.
5
282
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure
Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar.
Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
This placard tells you important information about the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
STARTING AND OPERATING
283
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg”
on your vehicle’s placard.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
5
284
STARTING AND OPERATING
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs NOTE:
(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs • The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
[295 kg]).
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
calculated in Step 4.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
(392 kg).
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING
285
5
286
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause accidents.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation, also increases
tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel
consumption.
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
287
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar.
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure conditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information” section of this manual.
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
5
288
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
outside temperature condition.
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla- build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
STARTING AND OPERATING
289
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation
Radial-Ply Tires
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
WARNING!
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Alloading may be required for high-speed vehicle operaways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
combine them with other types of tires.
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
WARNING!
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxiCompact Spare Tire
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
serious accident. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein75 mph (120 km/h).
stalled at the first opportunity.
5
290
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only.
With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary-use spare tires have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Prolonged use of limited use spare, or an incorrect
tire size on either front wheel, may damage transmission differential and result in loss of vehicle mobility.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the
compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or icy conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping.
STARTING AND OPERATING
291
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) or for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
5
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
to help you in determining when your tires should be grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
replaced.
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
292
STARTING AND OPERATING
Life of Tire
Replacement Tires
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
factors including but not limited to:
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu• Driving style
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva• Tire pressure
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed (refer to the paragraph on
• Distance driven
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
WARNING!
The service description and load identification will be
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years, found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use
regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend
could lose control and have an accident resulting in that you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire
serious injury or death.
specifications or capability.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
STARTING AND OPERATING
293
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
an accident resulting in serious injury or death.
Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have an accident.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
5
294
STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE CHAINS
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
Due to limited clearance, tire chains are not recom- was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
mended.
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h).
CAUTION!
Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are
used.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
SNOW TIRES
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
during Winter. Standard tires are of the all-season type
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
designation on the tire sidewall.
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only smooth, quiet ride.
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintesafety and handling of your vehicle.
nance intervals. More frequent rotation is permissible if
STARTING AND OPERATING
295
desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recomThe suggested rotation method is shown in the following
mended cold placard pressure.
diagram.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12 F (7 C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
Tire Rotation
also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.
5
296
STARTING AND OPERATING
The TPM System will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure
warning limit for any reason, including low temperature
effects and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPM System will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not
turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure
warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to turn off. The
system will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off once the system
receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need
to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68 F (20
C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20 F (-7 C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 23 psi (157 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle
may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately
27 psi (186 kPa), but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will still be ON. In this situation, the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn OFF only
after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended
cold placard pressure value.
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same
size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can
cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire
sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is
equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors
may result.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.
297
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light.”
5
298
STARTING AND OPERATING
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime
the tire.
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or
Base System
more of the four active road tires. Should this occur, you
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
value. Once the system receives the updated tire presreadings to the Receiver Module.
sures, the system will automatically update and the “Tire
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off. The
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
and to maintain the proper pressure.
15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
Check TPMS Warning
• Receiver Module
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid when
a system fault is detected. The system fault will also
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
sound a chime. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence
STARTING AND OPERATING
will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off
when the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault
can occur due to any of the following:
299
NOTE:
1. The compact spare tire (if so equipped) does not have
a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS
will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to 2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
sensors.
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the “TPM Telltale Light” will turn ON.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h), the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
housings.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
sound and the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on and off
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors. for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
5
300
STARTING AND OPERATING
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically and the “TPM
Telltale Light” will turn OFF, as long no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four
active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for
up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Three Trigger Modules (mounted in three of the four
wheel-wells)
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)
Premium System – If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to • Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
readings to the Receiver Module.
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly more of the four active road tires. In addition, the
and to maintain the proper pressure.
STARTING AND OPERATING
301
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible,
a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with and inflate all tires with low pressure (those flashing in
the low tire pressure values flashing.
the EVIC graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value. Once the system receives the
updated tire pressures, the system will automatically
update, the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flashing, and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
5
302
STARTING AND OPERATING
Check TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, a chime will sound and
the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, the EVIC will display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for three seconds and then display dashes
(- -) in place of the pressure value to indicate which
sensor is not being received.
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will no longer flash, and the ⬙CHECK TPM
SYSTEM⬙ message will no longer display, and a pressure
value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault
can occur due to any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM
sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
STARTING AND OPERATING
303
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound, the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC will
display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for three
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
pressure value.
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, the “TPM Telltale 5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
Light” will remain ON, a chime will sound, and the EVIC reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
will still display a flashing pressure value in the graphic the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
“TPM Telltale Light” will turn OFF and the graphic in the
display.
EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
(- -), as long no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
15 mph (25 km/h), the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on
warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
addition, the EVIC will display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYS15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
TEM⬙ message for three seconds and then display dashes
information.
(- -) in place of the pressure value.
NOTE:
1. The compact spare tire (if so equipped) does not have
a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS
will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
5
304
STARTING AND OPERATING
General Information
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
2.4L and 2.7L Engine
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
All engines are designed to meet all emisfollowing conditions:
sion regulations and provide excellent fuel
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
economy and performance when using
high quality unleaded “regular” gasoline
• This device must accept any interference received,
having an octane rating of 87. The use of
including interference that may cause undesired
premium gasoline is not recommended, as
operation.
it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the these engines.
following licenses:
3.5L Engine
The 3.5L engine is designed to meet all
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S120123
emissions regulations and provide satisfacCanada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2671-S120123
tory fuel economy and performance when
using high-quality unleaded gasoline having an octane range of 87 to 89. The manufacturer recommends the use of 89 octane
STARTING AND OPERATING
305
for optimum performance. The use of premium gasoline vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasois not recommended, as it will not provide any benefit lines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are
available.
over regular gasoline in these engines.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to Reformulated Gasoline
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
required.
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are spePoor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and imstarting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these prove air quality.
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline (with the apThe manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasopropriate octane rating for your engine) before considerlines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will proing service for the vehicle.
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
Over 40 automobile manufacturers around the world fuel system components.
have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specificaGasoline/Oxygenate Blends
tions (the World Wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxydefine fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced
genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygenemissions, engine performance, and durability for your
ates are required in some areas of the country during the
5
306
STARTING AND OPERATING
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions. manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in Methanol, it does not have the negative effects of
your vehicle.
Methanol.
CAUTION!
For vehicles equipped with a 2.4L or 3.5L engine, DO
NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or E85 Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting and
driveability problems and may damage critical fuel
system components.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• operate in a lean mode
NOTE: The 2.7L engine is now rated for E85 Ethanol
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
use (EXCEPT CALIFORNIA EMISSION STATES). Only
vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can operate on • poor engine performance
E-85. Refer to “Flexible Fuel” in “Starting and Operating”
• poor cold start and cold drivability
for further information.
• increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or
E85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the
STARTING AND OPERATING
307
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
E-85 perform the following:
or not his/her gasoline contains MMT.
• drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
It is even more important to look for gasolines without
• change the engine oil and oil filter
MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels
• disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the higher than those allowed in the United States.
engine controller memory
MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformuMore extensive repairs will be required for prolonged lated gasolines.
exposure to E-85 fuel.
Materials Added to Fuel
MMT in Gasoline
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage conditions and they would result in additional cost.
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug fuel.
life and reduces emission system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
5
308
STARTING AND OPERATING
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emission control system.
• An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
(Continued)
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle
performance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of
the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
309
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired,
drive with all side windows fully open.
• Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle
to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous
exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
5
310
STARTING AND OPERATING
FLEXIBLE FUEL (2.7L ONLY) — IF EQUIPPED
E85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E85) or Unleaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those
subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to
the other sections of this manual for information on
features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
gasoline-only powered vehicles.
NOTE: The 2.7L engine is now rated for E85 Ethanol
use (EXCEPT CALIFORNIA EMISSION STATES). Only
vehicles with the E85 fuel filler door label can operate on
E85.
E85 Fuel Cap
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E85 fuel filler door label can
operate on E85.
STARTING AND OPERATING
311
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the
tank. Do not use E85 as a cleaning agent and never
use it near an open flame.
E85 Badge
Fuel Requirements
If your vehicle is E85 compatible, it will operate on
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87, or E85
fuel, or any mixture of these two fuels.
Ethanol Fuel (E85)
For best results, a refueling pattern that avoids alternatE85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and
ing between E85 and unleaded gasoline is recom15% unleaded gasoline.
mended.
5
312
STARTING AND OPERATING
When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that:
• you do not add less than 5 gal (19 L) when refueling
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline
additive, such as MOPAR威 Injector Cleanup or
Techron may be used.
• you drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
least 5 miles (8 km)
(E85) and Gasoline Vehicles
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard FFV vehicles operated on E85 require specially formustarting and/or significant deterioration in driveability lated engine oils. These special requirements are included
in MOPAR威 engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
during warm up.
Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer only
NOTE:
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
• Use seasonally adjusted E85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With
the requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395
non-seasonally adjusted E85 fuel, you may experience
contains additional requirements, developed during exhard starting and rough idle following start up even if
tensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to
the above recommendations are followed, especially
Chrysler Group LLC engines. Use MOPAR威 or an
when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.
• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E85 and may form deposits in your
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
STARTING AND OPERATING
313
Starting
The characteristics of E85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an
increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
until the engine is fully warmed up.
Replacement Parts
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol compatible parts.
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) is
beneficial for E85 startability when the ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
CAUTION!
Maintenance
Cruising Range
If you operate the vehicle using E85 fuel, follow the
Because E85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
maintenance schedule section of this manual.
than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel
consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon
CAUTION!
(mpg)/miles per liter and your driving range to decrease
by about 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect driveability.
5
314
STARTING AND OPERATING
After removing the gas cap, place the gas cap tether cable
over a hook on the inside of the fuel door. This keeps the
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
gas cap suspended away from and protects the vehicle’s
The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door, on the left rear surface.
quarter panel of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or
damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use with this
vehicle.
ADDING FUEL
Tether Cable
Fuel Filler Door
NOTE: If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the
replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING
315
CAUTION!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap).
• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and doing so will cause the MIL to turn on.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank filled.
(Continued)
NOTE:
• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened
properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn
on if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure
that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is
refueled.
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
5
316
STARTING AND OPERATING
Loose Filler Cap Message
If the vehicles diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap in loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“gASCAP” message will be displayed in the instrument
cluster. Tighten the gas cap until a “clicking” sound is
heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly
tightened. Press the trip odometer reset button to turn off
the message. If the problem persists, the message will
appear the next time the vehicle is started. This might
indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected twice
in a row, the system will turn on the MIL. Resolving the
problem will turn the MIL off.
VEHICLE LOADING
• Name of manufacturer
• Month and year of manufacture
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Type of Vehicle
• Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Vehicle Certification Label
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Your vehicle has a certification label attached to the rear The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
of the driver’s door.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
The label contains the following information:
GVWR.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
WARNING!
317
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to insure that it
is not over the GVWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
Overloading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and front
and rear GAWR.
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle by axle and side by side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
5
318
STARTING AND OPERATING
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight. Common Towing Definitions
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way you in understanding the following information:
the brakes operate.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section, you will find safety tips and information This includes driver, passengers, cargo, and tongue
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
review this information to tow your load as efficiently Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.
and safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve- The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temhicles used for trailer towing.
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
If you have any questions or concerns after reviewing ready for operation⬙ condition.
this section, please consult your dealer to for full details
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
on the towing capabilities of the vehicle.
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
STARTING AND OPERATING
319
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
Trailer Tongue Weight (TW)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
and trailer when weighed in combination.
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less
NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg) than or more than 10% of the trailer load. You must
consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
allowance for the presence of a driver.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the truck. These kinds of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small- and mediumsized trailers.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
5
320
STARTING AND OPERATING
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) chart for the Max. GTW towable for your
given drivetrain.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry
Standards
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Duty
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Heavy Duty
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING
321
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings
Max. GTW
Max. Trailer Tongue Wt.
Engine/Transmission
Max. Frontal Area
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
(See Note 1)
2.4L/Auto
See Note 2
Not Recommended
Not Recommended
2.7L/Auto
See Note 2
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
3.5L/Auto
22 sq.ft. (2.0 sq.m)
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
Note 1: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and
cargo, and it should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer
to “Tire Safety Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
Note 2: Enclosed trailers or open utility trailers with front shields/guards are not recommended for use with
all 4 cylinder and 2.7L engines with automatic transmission. Please see your authorized dealer for additional
information.
5
322
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Towing a trailer with a larger than recommended
frontal area could cause the engine to overheat or
cause severe engine damage under extreme conditions.
Trailer and Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% of the Gross Trailer
Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads
balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause
the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause Consider the following items when computing the
loss of control of vehicle and trailer. Failure to load weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer • The trailer tongue weight of the trailer.
accidents.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
Never exceed the maximum trailer tongue weight
put in or on your vehicle.
stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or authorized dealer-installed
options, must be considered as part of the total load on
your vehicle. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information
placard in “Tire Safety Information” in this section for the
maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for
your vehicle.
CAUTION!
Incorrect trailer tongue weight could result in increased yaw or vehicle instability. A negative trailer
tongue weight could unload the rear suspension of
the tow vehicle decreasing vehicle stability. Negative
trailer tongue weight could cause the trailer to squat
and potentially become disengaged from the tow
vehicle resulting in a runaway trailer condition.
323
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended:
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle.
This helps the engine and other parts of the
vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
5
324
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and that it will not shift during travel. When
trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic
load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the
driver to control. You could lose control of your
vehicle and have an accident.
• When hauling cargo, or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance, or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
(Continued)
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and
allow enough slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic
transmission in PARK. Always, block or ⴖchockⴖ
the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
3. GAWR
4. Trailer tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch
utilized (This requirement may limit the ability to
always achieve 10% of trailer tongue weight as a
percentage of total trailer weight).
325
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for information on tread wear indicators and for proper inspection
procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for information
on replacement tires and for proper tire replacement
Towing Requirements – Tires
procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load carry• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
ing capacity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR and
spare tire.
GAWR limits.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to the
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Oper- • Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation prespersonal injury.
sures before trailer usage.
5
326
STARTING AND OPERATING
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (450 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes with adequate
braking capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have an
accident.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result
in an accident.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights and Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
STARTING AND OPERATING
327
If you REGULARLY TOW a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation, then change the automatic
transmission fluid and filter according to the interval
specified for “police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.” Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
Make sure all trailer and vehicle lights are working
maintenance intervals.
properly – including hazard flashers.
NOTE: Check the four-speed automatic transmission
Automatic Transmission
fluid level before towing. The AutoStick威 six-speed transThe DRIVE range can be selected when towing. Howmission is sealed and the fluid level cannot be checked.
ever, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, third
See your authorized dealership service center for
gear for a four-speed automatic and the fifth gear for a
assistance.
six-speed AutoStick威 should be selected.
Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped
NOTE: Using third or fifth instead of DRIVE while
operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions, • Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
will improve performance and extend transmission life
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
by reducing excessive shifting and heat build-up. This
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
action will also provide better engine braking.
you can get back to cruising speed.
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
and backing the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
5
328
STARTING AND OPERATING
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
maximize fuel efficiency.
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Cooling System
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over- towing with all four wheels on the ground)
heating, take the following actions:
• City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
• Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
• Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
CAUTION!
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain will result.
NOTE: If the vehicle requires towing make sure all four
wheels are off the ground.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flasher
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 䡵 Jump-Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
䡵 If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
▫ Engine Oil Overheating — 2.4L Engine Only
(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
▫ With The Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
▫ Without The Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
6
330
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
instrument panel, below the radio.
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning • On the highways — Slow down.
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional
• In city traffic — While stopped, put transaxle in
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flasher.
CAUTION!
This is an emergency warning system and should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the
Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate with the
ignition key removed and the vehicle locked.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flasher
may wear down your battery.
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark,
the instrument cluster will sound a chime. When
safe, pull over and stop the vehicle with the engine at
idle. Turn off the air conditioning and wait until the
pointer drops back into the normal range. If the
pointer remains on the H (red) mark for more than a
minute, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
331
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down Engine Oil Overheating — 2.4L Engine Only (If
an impending overheat condition:
Equipped)
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C During sustained high-speed driving or trailer tow up
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and long grades on hot day, the engine oil temperature may
become too hot. If this happens, the “HOTOIL” message
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
flashes, the vehicle speed will be reduced to 53 mph
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum (85 km/h) until the engine oil temperature is reduced.
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a NOTE: Engine speed is reduced to 53 mph (85 km/h) at
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat the maximum. You may of course, reduce your speed
further if needed.
from the engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
6
332
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you.
You could be crushed. Never get any part of your
body under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start
or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should
be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
areas.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Place the shift lever into PARK (automatic transaxle)
(Continued) or REVERSE (manual transaxle).
4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
5. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
333
6. Block both the front and rear of the Spare Tire Removal
wheel diagonally opposite the jacking Lift up the load floor cover and remove the hold down.
position. For example, if changing the
right front tire, block the left rear
wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Jack Location
The jack and jack-handle are stowed under the load floor
in the trunk.
Spare Tire Stowage
The compact spare tire is stowed under the rear load floor
in the trunk.
6
Spare Tire and Jack Stowage
334
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jacking Instructions
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
335
Jack Warning Label
1. Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the
spare wheel as an assembly. Turn the jack screw to the left
to loosen the lug wrench, and remove the wrench from
the jack assembly.
NOTE: The Jack Handle attaches to the side of the jack
Removing Jack Handle From Jack
with two attachment points. When the jack is partially
expanded, the tension between the two attachment 2. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts by turning
them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the
points holds the jack handle in place.
ground.
6
336
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jacking Locations
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in Step 3.
337
head is properly engaged with the lift area closest to the
wheel to be changed. Do not raise the vehicle until you
are sure the jack is securely engaged.
WARNING!
3. There is one front jacking location and one rear jacking
location on each side of the vehicle. The front locations
are outlined by two triangular cutouts, the rear ones by
two rectangular cutouts. For vehicles equipped with
plastic trim, the plastic has been cut away to expose the
jacking locations in the body.
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right,
Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until the
tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is
securely engaged.
obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift
4. Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be
provides maximum stability.
placed under the jacking location. Once the jack is
positioned, turn the jack screw to the right until the jack 6. Remove the wheel nuts, and pull the wheel and wheel
covers (if equipped) off the hub. Install the spare wheel
and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the nuts
6
338
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts. To avoid the tightened the nuts correctly, have them checked with a
risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the torque wrench by your dealer or at a service station.
nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered.
9. Remove the wheel blocks and lower the jack until it is
free. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and
WARNING!
stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the assembly using
To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel the means provided.
covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp edges.
WARNING!
NOTE: For vehicles so equipped, the wheel cover is
held on the wheel by the wheel nuts. When reinstalling
the original wheel, properly align the wheel cover to the
valve stem, place the wheel cover onto the wheel, and
then install the wheel nuts.
7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
10. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area, have the
8. Finish tightening the nuts. Push down on the wrench tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible.
while tightening the wheel nuts. Alternate nuts, until
each nut has been tightened twice. The correct wheel nut 11. Check the spare tire pressure as soon as possible.
torque is 100 ft. lbs (135 N. m). If you doubt that you have Correct the tire pressure as required.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JUMP-STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
339
Preparations for Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located between the left
front headlight assembly and the left front wheel splash
shield. To allow jump-starting there are remote battery
posts located on the left side of the engine compartment.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack follow
the manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
6
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
Remote Battery Posts
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post (covered with protective cap)
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
340
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is on. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive
(+) battery post. To remove the cover, press the locking
tab and pull upward on the cover.
Locking Tab
4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrithe vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
cal accessories.
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
341
WARNING!
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
WARNING!
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
6
342
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
10. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote positive (+) battery post of the discharged vehicle.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in you should have the battery and charging system inthe reverse sequence:
spected at your authorized dealer.
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
CAUTION!
Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
vehicle.
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between REVERSE and FIRST gear. Using minimal accelerator pedal
pressure to maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels, is most effective.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), turn the system to Partial OFF
before attempting to “rock” the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving between 1st and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels
faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage
may result.
(Continued)
343
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the
wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no
transmission shifting occurring).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
6
344
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
With The Ignition Key
Your vehicle may be towed under the following conditions:
• The shift lever must be in NEUTRAL.
• The distance to be traveled must not exceed 15 miles
(25 km).
• The towing speed must not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
CAUTION!
• Exceeding these towing limits may cause a transaxle failure.
(Continued)
• If the transaxle is not operative, or if the vehicle is
to be towed more than 15 miles (25 km), the
vehicle must be transported either with a flatbed
truck (all four wheels off the ground) or with the
front wheels off the ground, otherwise damage to
the transmission may occur.
• If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the
ignition switch must be in the ON position, not in
the LOCK or ACC position.
• Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front
with sling-type towing equipment. Damage to the
front fascia will result.
• Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and transaxle may result.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
345
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the key must be in the ON position,
not the ACC position. Make certain the transaxle remains
in NEUTRAL.
Without The Ignition Key
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK position. Flat bed towing
is the preferred towing method. However, if a flatbed
towing vehicle is not available, a wheel lift towing
vehicle may be used. Furthermore, rear towing is not
recommended with the front wheels on the ground, as
transaxle damage can result. If rear towing is the only
alternative, a front end dolly must be used. Proper
towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the
vehicle.
6
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Engine Compartment — 2.4L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
䡵 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
䡵 Engine Compartment — 2.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
䡵 Engine Compartment — 3.5L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . 352
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 352
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
䡵 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
䡵 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
▫ A/C Air Filter – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
7
348
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
䡵 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
䡵 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
▫ Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
▫ Front Turn Signal/Parking Lamp . . . . . . . . . 396
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
▫ Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
▫ Tail/Stop, Rear Turn Signal And Backup
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
▫ Cleaning Center Console Cupholders . . . . . . 384
▫ License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
▫ Convertible Top Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . . 402
▫ Weather Strip Care – Soft And Hard Top . . . . 387 䡵 Fluid Capacities
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
䡵 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 䡵 Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . 404
▫ Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) . . . 388
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
䡵 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
349
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
— Engine Coolant Reservoir
— Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
— Automatic Transmission Dipstick
— Brake Fluid Reservoir
— Integrated Power Module
— Power Distribution Center
7 — Air Cleaner Filter
8 — Engine Oil Fill
9 — Coolant Pressure Cap
10 — Engine Oil Dipstick
11 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
350
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.7L
1
2
3
4
5
6
— Engine Coolant Reservoir
— Coolant Pressure Cap
— Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
— Automatic Transmission Dipstick (Four-Speed Only)
— Brake Fluid Reservoir
— Integrated Power Module
7 — Power Distribution Center
8 — Air Cleaner Filter
9 — Engine Oil Dipstick
10 — Engine Oil Fill
11 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
351
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.5L
7
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Engine Coolant Reservoir
Coolant Pressure Cap
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM)
6
7
8
9
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Engine Oil Dipstick
— Engine Oil Fill
— Washer Fluid Reservoir
352
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as maintaining
engine emissions well within current government regulations.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the “Malfunction Indicator Light” on could cause further damage to the
emission control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle must be
serviced before any emissions tests can be performed.
• If the “Malfunction Indicator Light” is flashing
while the engine is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist an authorized service technician in making repairs.
Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose or
soon as possible.
improperly installed. A “GASCAP” message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas cap
until a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard. This is an indication that
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
the gas cap is properly tightened. Press the trip odometer
“Reset” button to turn off the message. If the problem
persists, the message will appear the next time the
vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If
the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will
turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off.
353
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
do the following:
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system. crank or start the engine.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte- this test over.
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not 3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of
a normal bulb check.
system is ready for testing.
7
354
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
happen:
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
running.
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully Use of genuine MOPAR威 parts for normal/scheduled
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to enengine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR威 parts for maintenance
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your warranty.
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, DEALER SERVICE
you may need to do nothing more than drive your Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personvehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
355
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
attempting any procedure yourself.
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
CAUTION!
penalties being assessed against you.
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perWARNING!
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
You can be badly injured working on or around a
components or negatively impact vehicle performotor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
dealership or qualified repair center.
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me(Continued)
chanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
7
356
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of
your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance
intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these
components as the chemicals can damage your
engine, transmission, power steering or air conditioning. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed
because of component malfunction, use only the
specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not check oil level
before starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will
give you an incorrect reading.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and
only when the engine is hot, will improve the accuracy of
the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the
range markings on the dipstick. Either the range markings consist of a crosshatch zone marked SAFE or a
crosshatch zone marked with MIN at the low end of the
range and MAX at the high end of the range. Adding one
quart of oil when the reading is at the low end of the
range marking will raise the oil level to the high end of
the range marking.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not overfill the engine. Overfilling the engine
will cause oil aeration, which can lead to loss of oil
pressure and an increase in oil temperature. This
could damage your engine.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months,
whichever occurs first.
357
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
7
358
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) – 2.4L and 2.7L
Engines
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil filler
cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for
your vehicle.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) – 3.5L Engine
SAE 10W-30 engine oil is preferred for all operating
temperatures. The engine oil filler cap also shows the
recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartengine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on ment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informaengine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart- tion.
ment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
359
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi- environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num- station, or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
ber should not be used.
your area.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom- Engine Oil Filter
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom- The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes at every engine oil change.
are followed.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
Materials Added to Engine Oils
All of this manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad- disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacedition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to ment. The quality of replacement filters varies considerthe engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and ably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure
it’s performance may be impaired by supplemental most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine oil filters are high
additives.
quality oil filters and are recommended.
Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
7
360
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine air
cleaner filters are high quality and are recommended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
NOTE: The battery is stored in a compartment behind
the left front fender and is accessible without removing
the tire and wheel. Remote battery terminals are located
in the engine compartment for jump-starting. Refer to
_Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information. To access the battery, turn the steering wheel fully to the
right and remove the inner fender shield.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
361
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
7
362
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
R-134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealers or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
363
The A/C Air Filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
the glove box. Perform the following procedure to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove box and remove all contents.
2. Push in on the sides of the glove box and lower the
door.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System 3. Disconnect the glove box door dampener from the slot
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compres- on the side of the box. This is done by grasping the
sor Oil, and Refrigerants.
dampener connector (on the outside of the box) and the
end of the connector pin (on the inside of the box) with
A/C Air Filter – If Equipped
your thumb and forefinger and pulling outward while
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
lightly lifting upward on the door with your other hand.
Once disconnected, the dampener will retract underWARNING!
neath the instrument panel if you release it.
Do not remove the A/C Air Filter while the blower is
4. Pivot the glove box downward.
operating or personal injury may result.
7
364
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter 7. Install the A/C Air Filter with the arrow on the filter
cover to the HVAC housing and remove the cover.
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter cover,
make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the cover.
CAUTION!
The A/C Air Filter is labeled with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
to install the filter properly will result in the need to
replace it more often.
8. Reinstall the glove box door dampener and glove box.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
A/C Air Filter Replacement
6. Remove the A/C Air Filter by pulling it straight out of tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
the housing.
MOPAR威 Spray White Lube or equivalent, to assure
quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
365
concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and
grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given to
hood latching components to ensure proper function.
When performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be
cleaned and lubricated.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild non-abrasive cleaner or use the washer solvent. This
will remove accumulations of salt, waxes, or road film
and help reduce streaking and smearing.
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any condition is
present please proceed to clean wiper blades with humid
cloth removing any debris that may be affecting its
function.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Make sure that they are not frozen to the
glass before turning them on to avoid damaging the
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a blade.
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR威 Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum
Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
lock cylinder.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-
7
366
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers is located
in the engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid
level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir
with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze)
and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
residual water.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
367
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can
contact anything that can burn.
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
7
368
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con- To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damverter will not require maintenance. However, it is im- age:
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
damage.
motion.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
vehicle.
against you.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at anytime the ignition switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling
system pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
369
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed, and refilled with fresh engine coolant (antifreeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
Cooling System – Drain, Flush, and Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze).
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
7
370
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Selection Of Coolant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended coolant. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze), may
result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, it should be replaced with the
specified engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as
possible.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they
may not be compatible with the engine coolant
(antifreeze) and may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of Propylene Glycol based engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance
(Continued) intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
to five years or 102,000 miles (170 000 km) before
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that you use the same
engine coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your
vehicle.
371
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to mainPlease review these recommendations for using Hybrid tain the proper level of protection against freezing acOrganic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
(antifreeze). When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR威 NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or will require more frequent coolant changes.
equivalent.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
exceed 70%) if temperatures below ⫺34°F (⫺37°C) are (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
anticipated.
recovery bottle.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion- The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
7
372
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze)
when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat
causes pressure to build up in the cooling system.
To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol based
engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up
any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
4 Cylinder Engines — the coolant bottle provides a quick
visual method for determining that the engine coolant
(antifreeze) level is adequate. With the engine idling and
warm to normal operating temperature, the level of the
engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the “ADD” and “FULL” lines, shown on the bottle.
6 Cylinder Engines — the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the pressurized coolant bottle should be
Disposal of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant (antifreeze) is between the “COLD” and “FULL” range on the bottle
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check when the engine is cold.
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the
engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant
bottle need only be checked once a month. When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain
the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle.
Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
373
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
• Check engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point in the
radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If engine
coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, contents of
coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against
freezing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles
required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle
(kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor coming
does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling
from the front of the engine compartment. This is norsystem should be pressure tested for leaks.
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor- • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum)
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
your engine, which contains aluminum components.
7
374
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory cooling performance, poor gas Master Cylinder – Brake Fluid Level Check
mileage, and increased emissions.
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately
if the brake system warning light indicates system failBrake System
ure.
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically. Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when perRefer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information. forming underhood services.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid level up
to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear.
Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are
replaced. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
375
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also labeled on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
(Continued)
7
376
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard
or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a accident.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
failure. This could result in an accident.
(Continued)
Automatic Transmission
The automatic transmission and differential assembly are
contained within a single housing.
The fluid level in the automatic transmission should be
checked whenever the vehicle is serviced. Operation with
an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the
transmission and the fluid.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
377
driven at least 15 miles (24 km). Hot fluid cannot be held
Fluid Level Check – 2.4L and 2.7L Engines
Use the following procedure to check the automatic comfortably between the fingertips. Cold fluid is at a
transmission fluid level properly:
temperature below 80°F (27° C).
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
2. Run the engine at curb idle speed for a minimum of
60 seconds.
3. Apply the parking brake fully.
4. Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear position ending with the lever in PARK.
7. Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert until seated. Then,
remove dipstick and note the reading.
a. If the fluid is hot, the reading should be in the
crosshatched area marked “HOT” (between the upper
two holes in the dipstick).
b. If the fluid is cold, the fluid level should be between
the lower two holes in the area marked “COLD.”
5. Wipe the area around the dipstick clean to eliminate
If the fluid level is low, add sufficient fluid through the
the possibility of dirt entering the transmission.
filler (dipstick) tube to bring it to the proper level. Do not
6. Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot overfill.
or cold. Hot fluid is approximately 180°F (82° C), which
is the normal operating temperature after the vehicle is
7
378
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque
converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid
other than that recommended by the manufacturer
will result in more frequent fluid and filter
changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
• Dirt and water in the transmission can cause
serious damage. To prevent dirt and water from
entering the transmission after checking or replenishing fluid, make certain that the dipstick cap is
re-seated properly.
Fluid Level Check – 3.5L Engine
The automatic transmission has no dipstick and is dealer
serviced only.
Transmission Fluid and Filter Changes
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
In addition, change the fluid and filter if the transmission
is disassembled for any reason.
Special Additives
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid
leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as
they may adversely affect seals.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
379
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion
The most common causes are:
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
• Road salt, dirt, and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap, and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
7
380
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR威 Car Wash or equivalent, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels
completely with clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威 Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR威 Special Care
Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film, stains • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
scratch the paint.
a month.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear
finish.
and open.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
381
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome-plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly with
considered the responsibility of the owner.
a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
• If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use MOPAR威
similar cause which destroys the paint and protective
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a nonabrasive,
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as posnon-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel wool,
sible. The cost of such repairs is considered the respona bristle brush, or metal polishes. Only MOPAR威 or
sibility of the owner.
equivalent is recommended. Do not use oven cleaner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’ protective
packaged and sealed.
finish.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
• Use MOPAR威 Touch Up Paint or equivalent on
scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle. different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
7
382
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and • For grease stains, apply MOPAR威 Multi-Purpose
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
Cleaner or equivalent to a clean, damp cloth and
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution folremove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove
lowed by rinsing.
soap residue.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel • Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
Interior Care
Equipped
Instrument Panel Cover
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manThe instrument panel cover has a low glare surface,
ner:
which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting use protectants or other products, which may cause
with a clean, dry towel.
undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to
restore the low glare surface.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
Cleaning Interior Trim
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR威 Total Clean or
Interior trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
equivalent, or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp
cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivacloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to
lent, then MOPAR威 Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent
remove soap residue.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
if absolutely necessary. Do not use harsh cleaners or
Armor All威. Use MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent to
clean vinyl upholstery.
Cleaning Leather Upholstery
MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recommended for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
383
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR威 Glass Cleaner or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
not use scrapers or other sharp instruments, which may
scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
7
384
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are buckles do not work properly.
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
Dry with a soft tissue.
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Cleaning Center Console Cupholders
1. Clean with a wet, soft rag. A mild soap solution may
be used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive Removal
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp Grab the rubber portion of the cupholder and lift
upward.
rag.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
wash them.
Cleaning
Soak the rubber cupholder liner in a mixture of medium
hot tap water and one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap.
Let soak for approximately one hour. After one hour pull
the liner from the water and dip it back into the water
about six times. This will loosen any remaining debris.
Rinse the liner thoroughly under warm running water.
Shake the excess water from the liner and dry the outer
surfaces with a clean soft cloth.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Installation
Align the liner in the cupholder and press down firmly.
Convertible Top Care
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew on the top material:
• Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they can damage the top material. Also, increased water pressure may force past the weather strips.
• Remove any standing water from the top and dry
the surface before opening it. Operating the top,
opening a door or lowering a window while the
top is wet may allow water to drip into the
vehicles interior.
(Continued)
385
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Use care when washing the vehicle, water pressure
directed at the weather strip seals may cause water
to leak into the vehicles interior.
Immediate removal of any contaminant is recommended.
Regular washing of the top will enhance its life and
appearance, and make successive cleanings easier. Do not
subject the top to excessive heat. Frequently vacuum the
top and storage compartment.
7
386
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Washing
Hand washing is highly recommended. Automatic car
washing equipment can damage the top material. If you
must use an automatic car wash, soft cloth systems are
preferred.
CAUTION!
Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they can damage
the top material. Also, increased water pressure may
force water past the weather strips.
General Cleaning
Careful vacuuming of the top before washing is helpful
in removing dust and other foreign particles. Wash in
partial shade instead of direct sun. Wet the entire vehicle
before washing the top. The top should be washed with
a soft, natural bristle scrub brush, and a mild soap
solution such as liquid dishwashing soap. Do not use
detergent.
CAUTION!
Never use an abrasive type cleaner or bleaches.
Cleaners should not contain silicones, organic solvents, petroleum distillates, or plasticizers. Always
wait until the top is thoroughly dry before lowering
it into the storage area.
Scrub in all directions, covering an area of about two
square feet at a time. Avoid heavy scrubbing. Rinse the
entire vehicle with water to remove all soap and dirt from
the top fabric and to prevent streaking on painted and
chrome surfaces. Allow the top to dry before lowering.
Vacuuming the top with a wet/dry shop vacuum will
decrease the top’s drying time, ensure removal of all dirt,
and delete streaks in the material. Multiple cleanings
may be necessary to remove stubborn stains. If stains
persist, contact your local dealership for further
suggestions.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Additional Cleaning Procedure
For additional cleaning assistance in removing stubborn
stains, apply MOPAR威 Convertible Cloth Top Cleaner or
equivalent to the complete stain, extending 2 inches
(50 mm) beyond the stain. With a soft bristle brush, scrub
in all directions over the stain. Avoid heavy scrubbing.
Rinse the area with warm water. If the stain is still
apparent, repeat the cleaning procedure. When the stain
is no longer showing, rinse the complete top with warm
water. Let the top dry before lowering it.
Protection
For appearance purposes, you may wish to protect your
cloth top periodically. A fabric protectant such as Scotchguard威 is suggested. The top should be clean and dry
before application of the protectant.
387
CAUTION!
Avoid getting Scotchguard威 on the surrounding
weather strips, moldings, paint, or glass. Damage to
these items might occur.
Weather Strip Care – Soft and Hard Top
Lubricate all top and door glass weather strips periodically with MOPAR威 Weather Strip Lubricant or equivalent to keep them soft and pliable.
7
388
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FUSES
Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM)
The TIPM is located in the engine compartment near the
air cleaner assembly. This center contains cartridge fuses
and mini fuses. A label that identifies each component
may be printed on the inside of the cover. Refer to the
graphic below for FUSES/TIPM location.
Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
1
2
Cartridge
Fuse
40 Amp
Green
—
3
—
4
—
5
—
6
—
Mini
Fuse
Description
—
Power Top Module – If Equipped
7
—
20 Amp
Yellow
AWD Module
8
—
9
40 Amp
Green
10
—
11
—
12
—
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
Battery Feed –
Center High
Mounted Stop
Light (CHMSL)/
Brake Switch
Battery Feed –
Ignition Switch
Trailer Tow – If
Equipped
Ignition Off Draw
(IOD) – Power
Mirror Switch/
Climate Controls
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
30 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Green
20 Amp
Yellow
15 Amp
Lt Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
389
Description
Ignition Off Draw
(IOD) Sense 1
Ignition Off Draw
(IOD) Sense 2
Battery Feed –
Power Seats – If
Equipped/PZEV
Air Pump – If
Equipped
Battery Feed –
Cabin Compartment Node (CCN)
Selectable Power
Outlet
—
7
390
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
13
Cartridge
Fuse
—
Mini
Fuse
20 Amp
Yellow
14
—
10 Amp
Red
15
40 Amp
Green
—
16
—
15 Amp
Lt. Blue
Description
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
—
Ignition Off Draw
(IOD) – Cabin
Compartment
Node (CCN)/
Interior Lighting
Battery Feed – Radiator Fan Relay
IGN Run/ACC –
Cigar Lighter/
PWR Sunroof
Mod
17
—
10 Amp
Red
18
40 Amp
Green
—
19
—
20 Amp
Yellow
20
—
21
—
15 Amp
Lt. Blue
10 Amp
Red
Description
Ignition Off Draw
(IOD) – Wireless
Control Module
(WCM)/Clock/
Steering Control
Module (SCM)
Battery Feed –
Auto Shutdown
(ASD) Relay
Ignition Off Draw
(IOD) – Power
Amp Feed 2 – If
Equipped
Ignition Off Draw
(IOD) – Radio
—
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
22
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
—
10 Amp
Red
23
—
15 Amp
Lt. Blue
24
—
25 Amp
Natural
25
—
10 Amp
Red
26
—
15 Amp
Lt. Blue
Description
Ignition Run –
Climate Controls/
Hot Cupholder –
If Equipped
Auto Shutdown
(ASD) Relay Feed
3
Battery Feed —
PWR Sunroof
Feed
Ignition Run —
Heated Mirrors If Equipped
Auto Shutdown
(ASD) Relay Feed
2
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
27
—
10 Amp
Red
28
—
10 Amp
Red
29
—
—
30
—
20 Amp
Yellow
391
Description
Ignition Run –
Occupant Classification Module
(OCM)/Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC)
Ignition Run —
Occupant Classification Module
(OCM)/Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC)
Hot Car (No Fuse
Required)
Ignition Run –
Heated Seats – If
Equipped
7
392
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
10 Amp
Red
31
—
32
30 Amp
Pink
—
33
—
10 Amp
Red
Description
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
—
Auto Shutdown
(ASD) Relay Feed
1
Battery Feed –
Switch Bank/
Diagnostic Link
Connector/
Powertrain Control Module
(PCM)
34
30 Amp
Pink
—
35
40 Amp
Green
—
Description
Battery Feed –
Anti-Lock Brakes
(ABS) Module – If
Equipped/
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)
Module – If
Equipped
Battery Feed –
Anti-Lock Brakes
(ABS) Module – If
Equipped/
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)
Module – If
Equipped
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
36
30 Amp
Pink
—
37
—
25 Amp
Natural
Description
Battery Feed –
Passenger Door
Module (PDM)/
Driver Door Module (DDM)
Power Top Module – If Equipped
CAUTION!
• When installing the Totally Integrated Power
Module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is
properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to
do so may allow water to get into the Totally
Integrated Power Module, and possibly result in
an electrical system failure.
(Continued)
393
CAUTION! (Continued)
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you will not be using your vehicle for more than
21 days, you may want to take steps to preserve your
battery.
• Disengage the mini-fuse in the Power Distribution
Center labeled IOD (Ignition Off-Draw).
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
7
394
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
REPLACEMENT BULBS
All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base.
Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not
be used for replacement.
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp
(CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W16W (921)
Rear Tail/Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
Rear Turn Signal Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
Backup Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157
LIGHT BULBS – Interior
Bulb Number License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 or W5W
Front Courtesy/Reading Lamps . . LED (Dealer Service)
BULB REPLACEMENT
Center Console Courtesy Lamp . . . . . . . . . . 578/W5W
Glove Box Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Headlamp
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
1. Raise and prop open the hood. Locate the connector
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your dealer for replace- behind the headlamp.
ment instructions.
NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the air cleaner
filter housing and position the totally integrated power
LIGHT BULBS – Exterior
Bulb No. module aside prior to replacing the low beam headlamp
Low Beam Headlamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9006
on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
High Beam Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005
Front Park/Turn Signal/Side Marker Lamp . . . 3457AK
Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSX24W
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
395
2. Reach into engine compartment and from behind the 3. Rotate bulb and connector one-quarter turn and pull
lamp assembly and grasp the connector.
outward from assembly.
7
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life.
396
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Pull the bulb out of the socket and replace the bulb.
Front Turn Signal/Parking Lamp
1. Raise and prop open the hood.
2. Rotate the bulb’s electrical connector one-quarter turn
counterclockwise and remove it from the headlamp
housing.
5. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface,
clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
6. Reinsert the bulb and socket assembly and rotate
clockwise one-quarter turn to secure.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
397
3. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install
the replacement bulb.
4. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the
headlamp housing and rotate the connector one-quarter
turn clockwise to lock it in place.
Front Fog Lamp
NOTE: Access to the lamps through the lower fascia
cutout is limited. We recommend you access the lamps by
turning the steering wheel to allow access and remove
the inner fender shield.
1. Rotate the bulb’s electrical connector one-quarter turn 2. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install
counterclockwise and remove it from the fog lamp hous- the replacement bulb.
ing.
7
398
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
3. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the fog
lamp housing and rotate the connector one-quarter turn
clockwise to lock it in place.
Tail/Stop, Rear Turn Signal and Backup Lamps
The taillamps are a two piece design. The turn signal,
brake and taillamps are located in the rear corner body
panel housing. The backup and taillamps are located in
the trunk lid housing.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
399
Changing the Tail/Stop Lamp or Rear Turn Signal
Lamp
1. Open the trunk and gently pull back the trunk liner
behind the taillamp
3. Grasp the taillamp housing and pull it firmly outward
while pushing gently on the studs from inside to disengage the housing from the vehicle.
2. Remove the two plastic wing nuts from the taillamp
housing.
7
400
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Rotate the applicable bulb’s electrical connector one- 5. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install
quarter turn counterclockwise and remove it from the the replacement bulb.
taillamp housing.
6. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the
taillamp housing and rotate the connector one-quarter
turn clockwise to lock it in place.
7. Reinstall the taillamp housing.
Changing the Backup Lamp
1. Open the trunk.
2. Rotate the bulb’s electrical connector one-quarter turn
counterclockwise and remove it from the housing.
1 — Tail/Stop Lamp
2 — Turn Signal Lamp
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
401
License Plate Lamp
1. Remove two retaining screws holding the lamp lens in
place.
1 — Rear Fog Lamp
2 — Backup Lamp
3. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install
the replacement bulb.
4. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the 2. Gently pry the lens loose.
housing and rotate the connector one-quarter turn clock- 3. Pull bulb from socket, replace and reattach the lamp
wise to lock it in place.
lens with the two retaining screws.
7
402
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
1. Open the trunk lid.
3. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install
the replacement bulb.
4. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the
2. Rotate the bulb’s electrical connector one-quarter turn
CHMSL housing and rotate the connector one-quarter
counterclockwise and remove it from the CHMSL housturn clockwise to lock it in place.
ing.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
403
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S.
Fuel (Approximate)
All Engines
16.9 Gallons
Engine Oil with Filter
2.4L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
4.5 Quarts
2.7L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
5.5 Quarts
3.5L Engine (SAE 10W-30, API Certified)
5.5 Quarts
Cooling System*
2.4L Engine (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5
7.7 Quarts
Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
2.7L Engine (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5
9.8 Quarts
Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
3.5L Engine (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5
11.6 Quarts
Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
Metric
64 Liters
4.4 Liters
5.2 Liters
5.2 Liters
7.3 Liters
9.3 Liters
11 Liters
7
404
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil – 2.4L and 2.7L Engines
Engine Oil – 3.5L Engine
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs – 2.4L Engine except PZEV*
Spark Plugs – 2.4L Engine with PZEV*
Spark Plugs – 2.7L Engine
Spark Plugs – 3.5L Engine
Fuel Selection – 2.4L and 2.7L Engines
Fuel Selection – 3.5L Engine
* PZEV = Partial Zero Emission Vehicle
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT
(Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements
of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil
filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Use API Certified SAE 10W-30 Engine Oil, meeting Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct
SAE grade.
MOPAR威 Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
ZFR5F-11 (Gap 0.043 in [1.11 mm])
ZFR5AP (Gap 0.031 in [0.8 mm])
TE10PMC5 (Gap 0.050 in [1.27 mm])
ZFR5LP-13G (Gap 0.050 in [1.27 mm])
87 Octane
87 Octane Acceptable – 89 Octane Recommended
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
405
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed
ATF+4威 product.
MOPAR威 DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3 brake fluid is
not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake
fluids.
MOPAR威 Power Steering Fluid +4, MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4威 product.
7
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
▫ Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . 410 E
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 Emissions Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 408
䡵 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
408
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type
must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure
the continued proper functioning of the emissions control
system. These and all other maintenance services included in this manual, should be done to provide best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
S conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
C
H driving.
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles “Oil Change Required” will be displayed in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles “Change Oil” will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Inspection and service should also be done anytime a
malfunction is suspected.
Based on engine operation conditions the oil change
indicator message will illuminate, this means that service
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement or repair of the emisis required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced
sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
individual using any automotive part that has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or in the State of California, California Air Resources Board regulations.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
NOTE:
• The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicles oil
if it has been 6 months since your last oil change even
if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated.
• Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months, whichever comes first.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in
409 M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
At Each Stop for Fuel
N
C
• Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a E
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or under “Instrument Cluster Description/Odometer/Trip Odometer” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level
while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the
accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when
the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
S
C
H
E
D
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if U
L
required.
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
410
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Once a Month
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
• Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
• Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
master cylinder, and transmission and add as needed.
S
C
H • Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
E
operation.
D
U At Each Oil Change
L
E • Change the engine oil filter.
S
8
• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
6,000 Miles (10,000 km) or
6 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
411 M
12,000 Miles (20,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace as necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped).
❏ Inspect the CV joints. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 412 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 18,000 Miles (30,000 km) or
N
T 18 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate tires.
C
E
24,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace as necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
30,000 Miles (50,000 km) or
30 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
36,000 Miles (60,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (2.4L Engine
except PZEV*).
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four wheel disc brakes.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
413 M
Date
Dealer Code
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace as necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped).
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 414 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 42,000 Miles (70,000 km) or
N
T 42 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate tires.
C
E
48,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace as necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
54,000 Miles (90,000 km) or
54 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
60,000 Miles (100,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs (2.4L Engine except PZEV*).
Inspect the brake linings, and replace as necessary.
Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped).
Change the automatic transmission fluid & filter if using your vehicle for any of the
following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes.
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
415 M
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 416 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 66,000 Miles (110,000 km) or
N
T 66 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate tires.
C
E
72,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace as necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
78,000 Miles (130,000 km) or
78 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
84,000 Miles (140,000 km) or 84 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace as necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped).
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
417 M
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 418 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 90,000 Miles (150,000 km) or
N
T 90 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate tires.
C ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
96,000 Miles (160,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Replace the spark plugs (2.4L Engine
except PZEV*).
❏ Inspect and replace the PCV valve, if
necessary†.
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four wheel disc brakes.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace as necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
102,000 Miles (170,000 km) or
102 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (2.4L PZEV*,
2.7L and 3.5L Engines).
❏ Replace the timing belt (3.5L Engine).
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant.
❏ Inspect accessory drive belt, replace if
necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
419 M
108,000 Miles (180,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace as necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped).
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 420 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 114,000 Miles (190,000 km) or
N
T 114 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate tires.
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
120,000 Miles (200,000 km) or 120 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs (2.4L Engine except PZEV*).
Inspect the brake linings, and replace as necessary.
Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped).
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect the exhaust system.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid & filter.
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
126,000 Miles (210,000 km) or
126 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
421 M
132,000 Miles (220,000 km) or 132 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace as necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped).
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 422 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 138,000 Miles (230,000 km) or
N
T 138 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate tires.
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
144,000 Miles (240,000 km) or 144 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace as necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
150,000 Miles (250,000 km) or
150 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (2.4L Engine
except PZEV*).
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four wheel disc brakes.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
423 M
A
I
N
† This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer T
to the owner, but is not required to maintain emissions E
N
warranty.
A
N
C
WARNING!
E
* PZEV = Partial Zero Emission Vehicle
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . 427
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
䡵 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
䡵 MOPAR威 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
䡵 If You Need Assistance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
䡵 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center . . . . . 428
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . 428
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
9
426
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
䡵 Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
427
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
Prepare For The Appointment
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
for an appointment.
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
service history. This can often provide a clue to the with our products and services.
current problem.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
Prepare A List
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers have the
service advisor know.
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your correctly and in a timely manner.
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
9
428
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
This is why you should always talk to an authorized • Vehicle delivery date and mileage
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be reChrysler Group LLC Customer Center
solved with this process.
P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer- Phone: (800) 247–9753
ship. They want to know if you need assistance.
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
• If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the P.O. Box 1621
concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
center.
Phone: (800) 465–2001
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen- In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
ter should include the following information:
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
• Owner’s name and address
Mexico, D. F.
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
• Authorized dealership name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
429
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call 1-800-4852001).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Service Contract
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle contract documents, and contact the person listed in
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected those documents.
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
9
430
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR姞 PARTS
MOPAR威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
431
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
3V9.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, MasTo contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are acHotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: for an order form.
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
http://www.safercar.gov.
• Service Manuals
In Canada
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
information that students and professional technicians
should contact the Customer Service Department immeneed in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group
defect to the Canadian government should write to:
LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the
9
432
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
vehicle, system, and/or components is written in • Owner’s Manuals
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
and charts.
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diaand maintenance procedures as well as specifications,
grams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practicapabilities and safety tips.
cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled ve- Call toll free at:
hicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
find and correct problems the first time, using step-bystep troubleshooting and drivability procedures, • 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
Or
and equipment.
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
433
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perforrequirements in addition to these grades.
mance.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
WARNING!
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
times as well on the government course as a tire graded include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the peak traction characteristics.
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
9
434
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
436
INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Accessory Delay, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 370
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 360
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241,363
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362,363
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230,235,362
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59,64,79,159
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55,58,60
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,166
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370,403
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . 18
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
INDEX
437
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374,405
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Brake/Transaxle Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 77
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Back-Up Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,394
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . 26 Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39,79
Automatic Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . 164,174,408
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . 235
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247,250,376
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377,378,405
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377,378
Interlock System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252,253
Reset Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Selection Of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
10
438
INDEX
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349,350,351,358
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78,309
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112,230
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66,68,72,74
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70,72
Cigar Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182,184,198,200,203,213
Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Convertible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Convertible Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
INDEX
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 371
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369,372
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . 370,403,404
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148,384
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
439
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Deck Lid, Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Deck Lid, Power Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80,232,233,238
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Dipsticks
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377,378
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
10
440
INDEX
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
. . . . . . . . 138
. . . . . . . . 117 Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 353,408
. . . . . . . . 260 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349,350,351
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
. . . . . . . . 261
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369,404
Electric Rear Window Defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78,309
Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . 135
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . 172
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304,403
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Emergency Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356,403,404
Emergency, In Case of
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . 164,174,357,408
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349,350,351,358
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving
On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . .
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INDEX
441
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241,363
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359,404
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,128
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Flat Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Flat Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Flexible Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310,311
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310,313
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Fabric Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158,314
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Oil Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357,403
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . 61
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78,309
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78,366
Extender, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
10
442
INDEX
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377,378
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374,405
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264,405
Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 404
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123,127,166,397
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158,314
Filler Door (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304,404
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304,403
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . . . . . . . . See Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Fuel System Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . 314,316,352
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
INDEX
443
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123,124,394
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Gearshift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . 128
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17,27,259,304
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125,133
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317,319
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316,318
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123,124
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Hazard
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 128
10
444
INDEX
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HomeLink威 (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter
Hood Prop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
319
148
138
122
121
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66,67,68
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157,158
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123,129
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332,334
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Key, Programming . . . . .
Key, Replacement . . . . .
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer)
Key-In Reminder . . . . . .
Keyless Entry System . . .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Knee Bolster . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16
16
14
14
21
12
52
INDEX
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . 128,166
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70,72
Latch Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,394
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,123
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59,64,79,159
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
445
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123,128
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . 274
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127,166,397
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123,124
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . 125,133
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
10
446
INDEX
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . 170
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123,124
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . 168,295
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,123,128,166,396,398
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . 158
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316,317
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70,72
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine)
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . 360
. . . . . 355
. . . . . 355
. . . . . 408
. . 170,353
. . . . . 431
. . . . . 129
INDEX
447
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37,58,61
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55,58
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162,165
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164,174,408
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164,174
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356,404
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164,174,357,408
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359,404
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357,403
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354,430
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
10
448
INDEX
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358,403
Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352,353
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . 4,431
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Passenger Seat Back Tilt (Easy Entry System) . . . . 117
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 282
Power
Accessory Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . 144
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263,264
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Programming Transmitters
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
INDEX
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 371
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Radio, Satellite (Uconnect威 studios) . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Release, Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Remote Control
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 228
449
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Remote Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 164,174
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Reverse Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
10
450
INDEX
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Satellite Radio (Uconnect威 studios) . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37,39,79
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66,67,68,74
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39,40
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 370,404
Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . 182,184,198,200,203,213
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
INDEX
Shifting
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Side View Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Side Window Demisters (Defrosters) . . . . . . . . . . 241
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,128,398
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289,333
Specifications
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . 135,165
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27,247
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
451
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Steering
Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263,264
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound
System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149,393
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . 52
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Taillights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . .
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC)
....
....
....
...
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
162
398
134
235
10
452
INDEX
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . 158,330
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282,283
Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . 282
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277,286
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,286,433
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Flat Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332,338 To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Tonneau Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
INDEX
453
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Selection of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . See Transaxle
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Transmitter Battery Service
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Transmitter, Garage Door Opener
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Transmitter Programming
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . 21
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Transaxle
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 Trip Odometer Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247,250,376 Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35,37
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123,128,166,398
10
454
INDEX
Uconnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Understanding Your Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . 156
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283,316,317
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240,393
Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . 18
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Warning Lights
(Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Washer, Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130,133,366
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80,232,233,238
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130,133
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
INDEX
455
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Wiper, Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Windstop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
10
Chrysler Group LLC
10C27-126-AC
3rd Edition
Printed in U.S.A.